X11DPS-RE - Motherboard Supermicro - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL X11DPS-RE Supermicro

The information in this user's manual has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. The vendor assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the information in this manual, or to notify any person or organization of the updates. Please Note: For the most up-to-date version of this manual, please see our website at www.supermicro.com.

Super Micro Computer, Inc. ("Supermicro") reserves the right to make changes to the product described in this manual at any time and without notice. This product, including software and documentation, is the property of Supermicro and/or its licensors, and is supplied only under a license. Any use or reproduction of this product is not allowed, except as expressly permitted by the terms of said license.

IN NO EVENT WILL SUPER MICRO COMPUTER, INC. BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECULATIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, SUPER MICRO COMPUTER, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA STORED OR USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA.

Any disputes arising between manufacturer and customer shall be governed by the laws of Santa Clara County in the State of California, USA. The State of California, County of Santa Clara shall be the exclusive venue for the resolution of any such disputes. Supermicro's total liability for all claims will not exceed the price paid for the hardware product.

FCC Statement: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in an industrial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense.

California Best Management Practices Regulations for Perchlorate Materials: This Perchlorate warning applies only to products containing CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells. "Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate".

WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead, known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

The products sold by Supermicro are not intended for and will not be used in life support systems, medical equipment, nuclear facilities or systems, aircraft, aircraft devices, aircraft/emergency communication devices or other critical systems whose failure to perform be reasonably expected to result in significant injury or loss of life or catastrophic property damage. Accordingly, Supermicro disclaims any and all liability, and should buyer use or sell such products for use in such ultra-hazardous applications, it does so entirely at its own risk. Furthermore, buyer agrees to fully indemnify, defend and hold Supermicro harmless for and against any and all claims, demands, actions, litigation, and proceedings of any kind arising out of or related to such ultra-hazardous use or sale.

Manual Revision 1.1b

Release Date: September 18, 2020

Unless you request and receive written permission from Super Micro Computer, Inc., you may not copy any part of this document. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Other products and companies referred to herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or mark holders.

Copyright © 2020 by Super Micro Computer, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America

Preface

About This Manual

This manual is written for system integrators, IT technicians, and knowledgeable end users. It provides information for the installation and use of the X11DPS-RE motherboard.

About This Motherboard

The X11DPS-RE motherboard supports dual Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon Scalable-SP processors (Socket P) with a TDP (Thermal Design Power) of up to 205W, and 3 UPIs (UltraPath Interconnects) of up to 10.4 GT/s. With the Intel C627 chipset built-in, this motherboard supports up to 6TB of LRDIMM/RDIMM/NVDIMM DDR4 ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 DIMM slots (*Note 2 below), and it comes with four SATA 3.0 ports, two SATA DOM ports, and two PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 ports. The cutting-edge X11DPS-RE offers highly versatile NVMe options with an array of flexible PCIe solutions. It also supports up to 9TB memory with DCPMM modules installed. This motherboard is optimized for storage-intensive and high-performance systems with demanding workloads. Please note that this motherboard is intended to be installed and serviced by professional technicians only. For processor/memory updates, please refer to our website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/.

Notes: 1. UPI/memory speeds are dependent on the processors installed in your system. 2. Support for 2933MHz memory is dependent on the CPU SKU.

Manual Organization

Chapter 1 describes the features, specifications and performance of the motherboard, and provides detailed information on the Intel C627 chipset.

Chapter 2 provides hardware installation instructions. Read this chapter when installing the processor, memory modules, and other hardware components into the system.

Chapter 3 describes troubleshooting procedures for video, memory, and system setup stored in the CMOS.

Chapter 4 includes an introduction to the BIOS, and provides detailed information on running the CMOS Setup utility.

Appendix A provides BIOS Error Beep Codes information.

Appendix B lists software program installation instructions.

Appendix C lists standardized warning statements in various languages.

Appendix D provides UEFI BIOS Recovery instructions.

Appendix E provides information on how to configure secure boot settings.

Appendix F provides information on how to configure VROC RAID settings.

Appendix G provides information on how to configure Network Interface Card (NIC) settings.

Appendix H provides information on how to configure iSCSI settings.

Contacting Supermicro

Headquarters

Address: Super Micro Computer, Inc.

980 Rock Ave.

San Jose, CA 95131 U.S.A.

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail] (General Information)

[e-mail] (Technical Support)

Website: www.supermicro.com

Europe

Address: Super Micro Computer B.V.

's-Hertogenbosch, The Netherlands

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail] (General Information)

[e-mail] (Technical Support)

[e-mail] (Customer Support)

Website: www.supermicro.nl

Asia-Pacific

Address: Super Micro Computer, Inc.

3F, No. 150, Jian 1st Rd.

Zhonghe Dist., New Taipei City 235

Taiwan (R.O.C)

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email: [e-mail]

Website: www.supermicro.com.tw

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Check List....8
1.2 Processor and Chipset Overview....18
1.3 Special Features ....19
1.4 System Health Monitoring....19
1.5 ACPI Features....20
1.6 Power Supply 20
1.7 Advanced Power Management....20

Intel® Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM)....20

Management Engine (ME)....21

Intel® QuickAssist Technology....21

1.8 Intel® Optane DC Persistent Memory Overview 21

Chapter 2 Installation

2.1 Static-Sensitive Devices....22
2.2 Motherboard Installation....23
2.3 Processor and Heatsink Installation....25
2.4 Memory Support and Installation ....33
2.5 Rear I/O Ports 41
2.6 Front Control Panel 45
2.7 Connectors ....51
2.8 Jumper Settings ....60
2.9 LED Indicators....66

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting

3.1 Troubleshooting Procedures ......69
3.2 Technical Support Procedures ......73
3.3 Frequently Asked Questions ....74
3.4 Battery Removal and Installation 76
3.5 Returning Merchandise for Service....77
4.1 Introduction....78
4.2 Main Setup 79
4.3 Advanced Setup Configurations....81
4.4 Event Logs 128
4.5 IPMI 130

4.6 Security Settings ....133
4.7 Boot Settings....137
4.8 Save & Exit....140

Appendix A BIOS Codes

A.1 BIOS Error POST (Beep) Codes ....142

Appendix B Software

B.1 Microsoft Windows OS Installation....144
B.2 Driver Installation....146
B.3 SuperDoctor ^® 5....147
B.4 IPMI 148
B.5 Logging into the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller)....148

Appendix C Standardized Warning Statements

Appendix D UEFI BIOS Recovery

D.1 Overview....152
D.2 Recovering the UEFI BIOS Image....152
D.3 Recovering the Main BIOS Block with a USB Device....153
E.1 All Intel VMD Controllers Menu....157
E.2 Configuring RAID Settings 161
E.3 Use of Journaling Drive....177

Appendix F Secure Boot Settings

F.1 Boot mode select Feature....181
F.2 Secure Boot/ Secure Boot Mode/ CSM Support Features....182
F.3 Secure Boot Settings ....183
F.4 Key Management Settings....186

Appendix G Configuring iSCSI Settings

G.1 PCIe/PCI/PnP Features....203
G.2 Configuring iSCSI Settings....206

Appendix H Configuring Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

H.1 Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings 225

Chapter 1

Introduction

Congratulations on purchasing your computer motherboard from an industry leader. Supermicro motherboards are designed to provide you with the highest standards in quality and performance.

1.1 Check List

This motherboard was designed to be used in an SMCI-proprietary chassis only as a part of an integrated, complete system solution. It is not to be sold as an independent, standalone product; therefore, no shipping package will be included in the shipment.

Important Links

For your system to work properly, please follow the links below to download all necessary drivers/utilities and the user's manual for your motherboard.

• Supermicro product manuals: http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/
• Product drivers and utilities: http://www.supermicro.com/wftp
- Product safety info: http://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/safety_information.cfm
- If you have any questions, please contact our support team at: [e-mail]
- A secure data deletion tool designed to fully erase all data from storage devices can be found at our website: https://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/disclaimer.cfm?url=/wftp/utility/Lot9_Secure_Data_Deletion_Utility/

This manual may be periodically updated without notice. Please check the Supermicro website for possible updates to the manual revision level.

X11DPS-RE Motherboard Image

Green computer motherboard with multiple CPU and RAM slots, no visible text or symbols

Note: All graphics shown in this manual were based upon the latest PCB revision available at the time of publication of the manual. The components in the motherboard you received may or may not look exactly the same as the graphics shown in this manual.

X11DPS-RE Motherboard Layout
(not drawn to scale)

SP JFL1 VGA JLAN2 JLAN1 JUSB1 JPMILAN JCOM1 LEI1 JNK1 IPWR1 COLDERS LEI LED4 330 S-SATA15-SATA5 LED3 RD2.SO1 JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDOY JWDO SUPER® X11DPS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FC CE CPU1 CPU2 FANZFAM8 FANZFAM6 FANZFAM9 FANZFAM6 FANZFAM FANZFAM9 FANZFAM2 BICSL.CENCE

Note: Components not documented are for internal testing only.

JPQAT LE2 SP1 JPL1 LEDM1 VGA JLAN2 JLAN1 JUSB1 IPMI_LAN JCOM1 JWD1 JIPMB1 JTPM1 JRK1 LE1 JPWR1 BT1 JBT1 JPME1 JPM31 S-500 100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT1 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT2 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT3 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT4 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT5 JPT6 JPWR1 BT1 JBT1 JPME1S-500 100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 SUPER® X1DPS-RE REV3.01 DESIGNED IN USA FSCE CE SUPERX®

Notes:

• See Chapter 2 for detailed information on jumpers, I/O ports, and JF1 front panel connections.
• "■" indicates the location of Pin 1.
• Jumpers/LED indicators not indicated are used for testing only.
• To avoid causing interference with other components, please be sure to use an add-on card that is fully compliant with the PCI-standard on a PCI slot.
• Use only the correct type of onboard CMOS battery as specified by the manufacturer. Do not install the onboard battery upside down to avoid possible explosion.

Quick Reference Table
Jumper Description Default Setting

JBT1 CMOS Clear Open (Normal)
JP1 BIOS Advance Function Pins 2-3 (Normal)
JP5 BMC Power Button Ready Test Header Pins 1-2 (Normal)
JPB1 BMC Enable/Disable Pins 1-2 (Enabled)
JPL1 GLAN Enable/Disable Pins 1-2 (Enabled)
JPME1 ME Recovery Pins 1-2 (Normal)
JPME2 Manufacturing Mode	Pins 1-2 (Normal)
JPQAT	QAT (QuickAssist Technology) Enable/Disable	Pins 1-2 (Enabled)
JWD1	Watch Dog Timer Enable	Pins 1-2 (Reset)

LED Description Status

LE1	CPLD Heartbeat LED	Blinking Green: Normal
LE2	Onboard Power LED	Solid Green: Power on
LED1	UID LED	Solid Blue: Unit Identified
LED3	PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 SLOT 1 LED	Blinking Green: M.2 Active
LED4	PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 SLOT 2 LED	Blinking Green: M.2 Active
LEDM1	BMC Heartbeat LED	Blinking Green: Normal

Connector Description

BT1	Onboard CMOS battery
FAN1 ~ FAN8	System/CPU fan headers (FAN1: CPU Fan)
J30	PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 Slot 1
J31	PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 Slot 2
JCOM1/JCOM2	COM ports
JF1	Front control panel header
JIPMB1	4-pin external I2C header (for an IPMI card)
JIPMILAN	IPMI-Dedicated LAN port
JL1	Chassis intrusion header (Note: Please connect a cable from the Chassis Intrusion header at JL1 to the chassis to receive an alert via IPMI.)
JLAN1/JLAN2	10G LAN ports 1 and 2
JPWR1/JPWR2	Backplane power connectors
JRK1	Intel VROC RAID key header for NVMe Solid State Devices (SSD)
JSD1 - JSD2	SATA Disk-On-Module (DOM) power connectors
JTPM1 TPM/PORT80	Port 80 connector for Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
JUIDB2	Unit Identifier (UID) switch
JUSB1 (3.0)	USB 3.0 rear ports (USB12/13)

Connector Description

PSU1 Power Supply Unit 1

PSU2 Power Supply Unit 2

S-SATA4\~5 (Powered) SATA connectors with power-pins built-in with support of SuperDOMs

VGA VGA port

Note: To avoid causing interference with other components, please be sure to use an add-on card that is fully compliant with the PCI-standard on a PCI slot.

Motherboard Features

Motherboard Features

CPUDual Intel Intel Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors (Socket P) with support of 3 Intel UltraPath Interconnects (UPIs) links of up to 10.4 GT/sNote: Both CPUs need to be installed for full access to the PCIe slots, DIMM slots, and onboard controllers. Refer to the block diagram on page 18 to determine which slots or devices may be affected.

MemoryThe X11DPS-RE supports up to 6TB of LRDIMM/RDIMM/NVDIMM DDR4 ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 memory slots. (*Notes: 1. 2933 MHz memory is supported by the 82xx/62xx series processors only. 2. Up to 9TB memory is supported with DCPMM modules installed.)

DIMM SizeUp to 128GB at 1.2V

Note 1: Memory speed support depends on the processors used in the system.

Note 2: For the latest CPU/memory updates, please refer to our website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/motherboard.

ChipsetIntel C627

Expansion Slots2 PCIe 3.0 x32 Tray cable connector interface2 PCIe 3.0 x16 slots with riser card support

NetworkDual RJ45 10G LAN ports

BaseBoard Management Controller (BMC)ASPEED AST 2500 Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) supports IPMI 2.0One (1) dedicated IPMI_LAN located on the rear IO backpanel

GraphicsGraphics controller via ASPEED AST2500

I/O DevicesSerial (COM) PortTwo (2) serial-port header

SATA 3.0Total of 4 SATA 3 ports:Two (2) SATA DOM connectors (S-SATA4, S-SATA5)Two (2) PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 connections

Note: The table above is continued on the next page.

Motherboard Features

Peripheral DevicesTwo (2) USB 3.0 ports on the rear I/O panel (USB 12/13)

BIOS32 Mb SPI AMI BIOS SM Flash UEFI BIOSACPI 3.0 or later, PCI F/W 3.0, SMBIOS 2.7 or later

Power ManagementACPI power management (S4, S5)Power-on mode for AC power recoveryPower button override mechanism

System Health MonitoringOnboard voltage monitoring for +1.8V, +3.3V, +5V, +/-12V, +3.3V Stdby, +5V Stdby, HT, Memory, PCH Temp, System Temp, Memory Temp5 CPU (# of switching-phase voltage regulator)CPU/system overheat LED and controlCPU Thermal Trip supportPECI / TSICPU Thermal Design Power (TDP) support of up to 165W

Fan ControlEight 4-pin fan headersMulti-speed fan control via onboard BMC

System ManagementTrusted Platform Module (TPM) supportWatch Dog / Non-maskable interruptRoHSBMC SD Card SlotChassis intrusion header and detection (JL1) (Note: Please connect a cable from the Chassis Intrusion header at JL1 to the chassis to receive an alert via IPMI.)

LED IndicatorsCPU/OverheatingPower/Suspend-state indicatorFan FailureUID/Remote UIDHDD ActivityLAN Activity

Dimensions13.5" (L) x 16.73" (W) (342.9 mm x 424.94 mm)

Note 1: The CPU maximum thermal design power (TDP) is subject to chassis and heatsink cooling restrictions. For proper thermal management, please check the chassis and heatsink specifications for proper CPU TDP sizing.

Note 2: For IPMI configuration instructions, please refer to the Embedded IPMI Configuration User's Guide available at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/.

Note 3: It is strongly recommended that you change BMC login information upon initial system power-on. The manufacturer default username is ADMIN and the password is ADMIN. For proper BMC configuration, please refer to http://www.supermicro.com/products/info/files/IPMI/Best_Practices_BMC_Security.pdf

Figure 1-3. System Block Diagram

System architecture diagram showing data flow between CPU, memory, and peripheral components with labeled interfaces and signals.

Note: This is a general block diagram and may not exactly represent the features on your motherboard. See the previous pages for the actual specifications of your motherboard.

1.2 Processor and Chipset Overview

Built upon the functionality and capability of Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors (Socket P) and the Intel C627 chipset, the X11DPS-RE motherboard provides advanced storage solutions and a rich feature set based on cutting edge technology to address the needs of next-generation computer users. With the support of 3 UPIs (Intel® UltraPath Interconnects) of up to 10.4 GT/s, new Intel® AVX-512 instructions, and Intel® QuickAssist Technology, this motherboard offers maximum NVMe storage capabilities in a 1U form factor, and excellent system performance to meet the ongoing demands of High Performance Computing (HPC) platforms. This motherboard is optimized for big data platforms and Intel storage systems.

Features Supported by Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors support the following features:

• Intel AVX-512 instruction support to handle complex workloads
• 1.5x memory bandwidth increased to 6 channels
- Rich set of available IOs with increased PCIe lanes (48 lanes)
- Integrated Intel Ethernet Connection X722 with iWARP RDM

• Hot plug and enclosure management with Intel Volume Management Device (Intel VMD)

New features supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors support the following features:

• Higher performance for a wider range of workloads with per-core performance increase
• Support of Optane DC Persistent Memory (DCPMM) with affordable, persistent, and large capacity
• Up to 2993 MHz memory supported (Refer to Section 1.8 for details.)
• Vector Neural Network Instruction (VNNI) support for Accelerate Deep Learning & Artificial Intelligence (AI) workloads
• Speed Select Technology provides multiple CPU profiles that can be set in the BIOS. (This feature is available on select CPU SKUs)
• Seamless hardware security mitigations & performance/frequency flexibility

Note: DCPMM memory and 2933 MHz memory are supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors only.

1.3 Special Features

This section describes the health monitoring features of the X11DPS-RE motherboard. The motherboard has an onboard System Hardware Monitor chip that supports system health monitoring.

Recovery from AC Power Loss

The Basic I/O System (BIOS) provides a setting that determines how the system will respond when AC power is lost and then restored to the system. You can choose for the system to remain powered off (in which case you must press the power switch to turn it back on), or for it to automatically return to the power-on state. See the Advanced BIOS Setup section for this setting. The default setting is Last State.

1.4 System Health Monitoring

This section describes the health monitoring features of the X11DPS-RE motherboard. The motherboard has an onboard ASPEED AST2500 Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) that supports system health monitoring.

Onboard Voltage Monitors

The onboard voltage monitor will continuously scan crucial voltage levels. Once a voltage becomes unstable, it will give a warning or send an error message to the IPMI WebGPI and IPMIView. The user can adjust the voltage thresholds to define the sensitivity of the voltage monitor. Real time readings of these voltage levels are all displayed in IPMI.

Fan Status Monitor with Firmware Control

The system health monitor embedded in the BMC chip can check the RPM status of the cooling fans. The CPU and chassis fans are controlled via IPMI.

Environmental Temperature Control

System Health sensors in the BMC monitor the temperatures and voltage settings of onboard processors and the system in real time via the IPMI interface. Whenever the temperature of the CPU or the system exceeds the manufacturer-defined threshold, system/CPU cooling fans will be turned on to prevent the CPU or the system from overheating.

Note: To avoid possible system overheating, please be sure to provide adequate airflow to your system.

System Resource Alert

This feature is available when used with SuperDoctor 5 ^® which is used to notify the user of certain system events. For example, you can configure SuperDoctor 5 to provide you with warnings when the system temperature, CPU temperatures, voltages and fan speeds go beyond a predefined range.

1.5 ACPI Features

ACPI stands for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface. The ACPI specification defines a flexible and abstract hardware interface that provides a standard way to integrate power management features throughout a computer system including its hardware, operating system and application software. This enables the system to automatically turn on and off peripherals such as network cards, hard disk drives and printers.

In addition to enabling operating system-directed power management, ACPI also provides a generic system event mechanism for Plug and Play and an operating system-independent interface for configuration control. ACPI leverages the Plug and Play BIOS data structures while providing a processor architecture-independent implementation that is compatible with the appropriate Windows operating systems. For detailed information on OS support, please refer to our website at www.supermicro.com.

1.6 Power Supply

As with all computer products, a stable power source is necessary for proper and reliable operation, especially for processors that have high CPU clock rates.

1.7 Advanced Power Management

The following new advanced power management features are supported by the motherboard.

Intel® Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM)

Intel's Intelligent Power Node Manager (IPNM) provides your system with real-time thermal control and power management for maximum energy efficiency. Although IPNM Specification Version 2.0/3.0 is supported by the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller), your system must also have IPNM-compatible Management Engine (ME) firmware installed to use this feature.

Note: Support for IPNM 2.0/3.0 support is dependent on the power supply used in the system.

Management Engine (ME)

The Management Engine, which is an ARC controller embedded in the IOH (I/O Hub), provides Server Platform Services (SPS) to your system. The services provided by SPS are different from those provided by the ME on client platforms.

Intel® QuickAssist Technology

Built upon Intel's cutting-edge processor technology and the Intel Intel C627 chipset, the X11DPS-RE supports Intel® QuickAssist Technology (Intel QAT), which offers high-profile security and compression acceleration to standard server platforms in a software-defined infrastructure.

By eliminating unneeded roadblocks, Intel QAT accelerates computation-intensive operations; provides software-enabled foundation for security, authentication and compression; and significantly increases the performance and efficiency across applications and platforms, including cryptography, symmetric encryption and authentication, asymmetric encryption, digital signature, pattern matching, and lossless data compression.

With Intel QuickAssist Technology built in, the X11DPS-RE is optimized for the use and deployment of integrated accelerators in networking and security applications, and efficiently meets the complex demands of High-Performance Computing (HPC), Virtualization, storage, and big data platforms.

1.8 Intel® Optane DC Persistent Memory Overview

2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors support new DCPMM (Optane™ DC Persistent Memory Modules) technology that offers data persistence with higher capacity than existing memory modules and lower latency than NVMe SSDs. DCPMM memory provides hyper-speed storage capability for high performance computing platforms with flexible configuration options.

Chapter 2

Installation

2.1 Static-Sensitive Devices

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. To avoid damaging your motherboard and your system, it is important to handle them very carefully. The following measures are generally sufficient to protect your equipment from ESD.

Precautions

• Use a grounded wrist strap designed to prevent static discharge.
• Touch a grounded metal object before removing the board from the antistatic bag.
• Handle the board by its edges only; do not touch its components, peripheral chips, memory modules, or gold contacts.
• When handling chips or modules avoid touching their pins.
• Put the motherboard and peripherals back into their antistatic bags when not in use.
• For grounding purposes, make sure that your chassis provides excellent conductivity between the power supply, the case, the mounting fasteners, and the motherboard.
• Use only the correct type of CMOS onboard battery as specified by the manufacturer. Do not install the CMOS battery upside down as it may result in a possible explosion.

Unpacking

The motherboard is shipped in antistatic packaging to avoid static damage. When unpacking the motherboard, make sure that the person handling it is static protected.

2.2 Motherboard Installation

All motherboards have standard mounting holes to fit different types of chassis. Make sure that the locations of all the mounting holes for both the motherboard and the chassis match. Although a chassis may have both plastic and metal mounting fasteners, metal ones are highly recommended because they ground the motherboard to the chassis. Make sure that the metal standoffs click in or are screwed in tightly.

Phillips Screwdriver (1)

Phillips Screws (12)

Standoffs (12) Only if Needed

Tools Needed

Location of Mounting Holes

Notes: 1. To avoid damaging the motherboard and its components, please do not use a force greater than 8 lb/inch on each mounting screw during motherboard installation. 2. Some components are very close to the mounting holes. Please take precautionary measures to avoid damaging these components when installing the motherboard to the chassis.

Installing the Motherboard

1. Install the I/O shield into the back of the chassis if needed.

2. Locate the mounting holes on the motherboard. See the previous page for the location.

3. Locate the matching mounting holes on the chassis. Align the mounting holes on the motherboard against the mounting holes on the chassis.

Chassis Chassis

1. Install standoffs in the chassis as needed.

Motherboard Chassis Motherboard Chassis

1. Install the motherboard into the chassis carefully to avoid damaging other motherboard components.

2. Using the Phillips screwdriver, insert a Phillips head #6 screw into a mounting hole on the motherboard and its matching mounting hole on the chassis.

3. Repeat Step 5 to insert #6 screws into all mounting holes.

4. Make sure that the motherboard is securely placed in the chassis.

Note: Images displayed in this manual are for illustration only. Your chassis or components might look different from those shown in this manual.

2.3 Processor and Heatsink Installation

Warning: When handling the processor package, avoid placing direct pressure on the label area of the CPU or CPU socket. Also, improper CPU installation or socket misalignment can cause serious damage to the CPU or motherboard which may result in RMA repairs. Please read and follow all instructions thoroughly before installing your CPU and heatsink.

Notes:

• Always connect the power cord last and always remove it before adding, removing, or changing any hardware components. Please note that the processor and heatsink should be assembled together first to form the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM), and then install the entire PHM into the CPU socket.
• When you receive a motherboard without a processor pre-installed, make sure that the plastic CPU socket cap is in place and that none of the socket pins are bent. Otherwise, please contact your retailer immediately.
  • Refer to the Supermicro website for updates on CPU support.
• Please follow the instructions given in the ESD Warning section on the first page of this chapter before handling, installing, or removing system components.

Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Technical line drawing of a rectangular electronic component with mounting holes and internal structure (no text or symbols)

Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processor

Note: All graphics, drawings, and pictures shown in this manual are for illustration only. The components that came with your machine may or may not look exactly the same as those shown in this manual.

Overview of the Processor Socket Assembly

The processor socket assembly contains 1) Intel Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processor, 2) the narrow processor clip, 3) the dust cover, and 4) the CPU socket.

1. Intel Processor

Technical line drawing of a rectangular electronic component or tray (no text or symbols)

1. Narrow processor clip (the plastic processor package carrier used for the CPU)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket or frame structure (no text or symbols)

1. Dust Cover

Line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and a central slot (no text or symbols)

1. CPU Socket

Technical line drawing of a mechanical housing component with mounting holes and internal grid structure (no text or symbols)

Note: Be sure to cover the CPU socket with the dust cover when the CPU is not installed.

Overview of the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

The Processor Heatsink Module (PHM) contains 1) a heatsink, 2) a narrow processor clip, and 3) Intel Xeon Scalable-SP or 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processor.

1. Heatsink

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and a central rectangular housing (no text or symbols)

2. Narrow processor clip

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and internal brackets (no text or symbols)

3. Intel Processor

Diagram of a grid-patterned panel with a central oval and a downward green arrow below (no text or symbols)

Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

Technical line drawing of a computer processor housing (no text or symbols)

Bottom View

Attaching the Processor to the Narrow Processor Clip to Create the Processor Package Assembly

To properly install the CPU into the narrow processor clip, please follow the steps below.

1. Locate pin 1 (notch A), which is the triangle located on the top of the narrow processor clip. Also locate notch B and notch C on the processor clip.

2. Locate pin 1 (notch A), which is the triangle on the substrate of the CPU. Also, locate notch B and notch C on the CPU as shown below.

3. Align pin 1 (the triangle on the substrate) of the CPU with pin 1 (the triangle) of the narrow processor clip. Once they are aligned, carefully insert the CPU into the processor clip by sliding notch B of the CPU into notch B of the processor clip, and sliding notch C of the CPU into notch C of the processor clip.

4. Examine all corners of the CPU to ensure that it is properly seated on the processor clip. Once the CPU is securely attached to the processor clip, the processor package assembly is created.

Note: Please exercise extreme caution when handling the CPU. Do not touch the CPU LGA-lands to avoid damaging the LGA-lands or the CPU. Be sure to wear ESD gloves when handling components.

graph TD
    A["CPU (Upside Down) w/CPU LGA Lands up"] --> B["Pin 1"]
    B --> C["Align Notch C of the CPU and Notch C of the Processor Clip"]
    C --> D["CPU/Heatsink Package (Upside Down)"]
    D --> E["Align CPU Pin 1"]
    E --> F["CPU/Heatsink Package Carrier (w/CPU mounted on the Processor Clip)"]
    F --> G["Allow Notch B to latch on to CPU"]
    G --> H["Allow Notch C to latch on to CPU"]

Attaching the Processor Package Assembly to the Heatsink to Form the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

After you have made a processor package assembly by following the instructions on the previous page, please follow the steps below to mount the processor package assembly onto the heatsink to create the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM).

1. Locate "1" on the heatsink label and the triangular corner next to it on the heatsink. With your index finger pressing against the screw at this triangular corner, carefully hold and turn the heatsink upside down with the thermal-grease side facing up. Remove the protective thermal film if present, and apply the proper amount of the thermal grease as needed. (Skip this step if you have a new heatsink because the necessary thermal grease is pre-applied in the factory.)

2. Holding the processor package assembly at the center edge, turn it upside down. With the thermal-grease side facing up, locate the hollow triangle located at the corner of the processor carrier assembly ("a" in the graphic). Note the larger hole and plastic mounting clicks located next to the hollow triangle. Locate another set of mounting clicks and a larger hole at the diagonal corner of the same (reverse) side of the processor carrier assembly ("b" in the graphic). CPU and Processor Clip

3. With the back of heatsink and the reverse side of the processor package assembly facing up, align the triangular corner on the heatsink ("A" in the graphic) against the mounting clips next to the hollow triangle ("a") on the processor package assembly.

4. Align the triangular corner ("B") at the diagonal side of the heatsink with the corresponding clips on the processor package assembly ("b").

5. Once the mounting clips on the processor package assembly are properly aligned with the corresponding holes on the back of heatsink, securely attach the heatsink to the processor package assembly by snapping the mounting clips at the proper places on the heatsink to create the Processor / Heatsink Module (PHM).

CPU and Processor Clip (Upside Down) Triangle on the CPU Triangle on the Processor Clip Heatsink (Upside Down) On Locations of (C, D), the notches snap onto the heat sink's mounting holes On Locations (A, B), the notches snap onto the heatsink's sides Make sure Mounting Notches snap into place

Preparing the CPU Socket for Installation

This motherboard comes with the CPU socket pre-assembled in the factory. The CPU socket contains 1) a dust cover, 2) a socket bracket, 3) the CPU (P0) socket, and 4) a back plate. These components are pre-installed on the motherboard before shipping.

Technical line drawing of a computer processor casing with visible internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

CPU Socket w/Dust Cover On

Removing the Dust Cover from the CPU Socket

Remove the dust cover from the CPU socket, exposing the CPU socket and socket pins as shown on the illustration below.

Note: Do not touch the socket pins to avoid damaging them, causing the CPU to malfunction.

Dusk Cover Remove the dust cover from the CPU socket. Do not touch the socket pins! Socket Pins

CPU Socket

Installing the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM)

1. Once you have assembled the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM) by following the instructions listed on page 29, you are ready to install the module into the CPU socket on the motherboard. To install the PHM into the CPU socket, follow the instructions below.
2. Locate the triangle (pin 1) on the CPU socket, and locate the triangle (pin 1) at the corner of the PHM that is closest to "1." (If you have difficulty locating pin 1 of the PHM, turn the PHM upside down. With the LGA-lands side facing up, you will note the hollow triangle located next to a screw at the corner. Turn the PHM right side up, and you will see a triangle marked on the processor clip at the same corner of hollow triangle.)
3. Carefully align pin 1 (the triangle) on the the PHM against pin 1 (the triangle) on the CPU socket.
4. Once they are properly aligned, insert the two diagonal oval holes on the heatsink into the guiding posts.
5. Using a T30 Torx-bit screwdriver, install four screws into the mounting holes on the socket to securely attach the PHM onto the motherboard starting with the screw marked "1" (in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, and 4).

Note: To avoid damaging the LGA-lands and the processor, do not use excessive force when tightening the screws.

Oval C Oval D Large Guiding Post Small Guiding Post Printed Triangle Mounting the Processor Heatsink Module into the CPU socket (on the motherboard) T30 Torx Driver Use a torque of 12 lbf·in #1 #2 #3 Tighten the screws in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4 (top 3 quarter view)

Removing the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM) from the Motherboard

Before removing the Processor Heatsink Module (PHM), unplug power cord from the power outlet.

1. Using a T30 Torx-bit screwdriver, turn the screws on the PHM counterclockwise to loosen them from the socket, starting with screw marked #4 (in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1).

2. After all four screws are removed, wiggle the PHM gently and pull it up to remove it from the socket.

Note: To properly remove the processor heatsink module, be sure to loosen and remove the screws on the PHM in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1 as shown below.

Removing the screws in the sequence of 4, 3, 2, 1 #1 #2 #3 #4 Printed Triangle on Motherboard CPU Socket After removing the screws, lift the Processor Heatsink Module off the CPU socket.

2.4 Memory Support and Installation

Note: Check the Supermicro website for recommended memory. Exercise extreme care when installing or removing DIMM modules to prevent any damage.

Memory Support

The X11DPS-RE motherboard supports up to 6TB of LRDIMM/RDIMM/NVDIMM DDR4 ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 memory slots (*Note below). It also supports up to 9TB memory with DCPMM modules installed based on the DCPMM population table on page 38.

Notes: 1. 2933 MHz memory is supported by 2nd Generation Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx series) processors only. 2. 16Gb-based memory modules are supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors only.

Memory Installation Sequence

Memory modules for this motherboards are populated using the "Fill First" method. The blue memory slot of each channel is considered the "first DIMM module" of the channel, and the black slot, the second module of the channel. When installing memory modules, be sure to populate the blue memory slots first and then populate the black slots. To maximize memory capacity, please populate all DIMM slots on the motherboard, including all blue slots and black slots.

General Memory Population Requirements

1. Be sure to use the memory modules of the same type and speed on the motherboard. Mixing of memory modules of different types and speeds is not allowed.
2. Using unbalanced memory topology such as populating two DIMMs in one channel while populating one DIMM in another channel on the same motherboard will result in reduced memory performance.
3. Populating memory slots with a pair of DIMM modules of the same type and size will result in interleaved memory, which will improve memory performance.

A. DDR4 Memory Support for Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

DDR4 Memory Support
Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width	DIMM Capacity (GB)		Speed (MT/s); Voltage (V); Slots Per Channel (SPC) and DIMMs Per Channel (DPC)
				1 Slot Per Channel 2 Slots	Per Channel
		DRAM Density		1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	2DPC (2-DIMM Per Channel)
		4Gb* 8Gb	1.2 V 1.2 V 1.2 V
RDIMM SRx4	4GB 8GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM SRx8	8GB 16GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM DRx8	8GB 16GB 2666 2666	2666
RDIMM DRx4	16GB	32GB	2666 2666 2666
RDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2666	2666	2666
RDIMM 3Ds	8RX4	N/A	4H-128GB	2666	2666	2666
LRDIMM QRx4	32GB	64GB	2666 2666 2666
LRDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2666	2666	2666
LRDIMM 3Ds	8Rx4	N/A	4H-128GB	2666	2666	2666

B. DDR4 Memory Support for 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

DDR4 Memory Support
Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width	DIMM Capacity (GB)			Speed (MT/s); Voltage (V); Slots Per Channel (SPC) and DIMMs Per Channel (DPC)
					1 Slot Per Channel	2 Slots Per Channel
		DRAM Density			1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	1DPC (1-DIMM Per Channel)	2DPC (2-DIMM Per Channel)
		4Gb*	8Gb	16Gb	1.2 V	1.2 V	1.2 V
RDIMM	SRx4	4GB	8GB	16GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM	SRx8	8GB	16GB	32GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM	DRx8	8GB	16GB	32GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM	DRx4	16GB	32GB	64GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2H-128GB	2933	2933	2933
RDIMM 3Ds	8RX4	N/A	4H-128GB	4H-256GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM	QRx4	32GB	64GB	128GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM 3Ds	QRX4	N/A	2H-64GB	2H-128GB	2933	2933	2933
LRDIMM 3Ds	8Rx4	N/A	4H-128GB	4H-256GB	2933	2933	2933

Notes: 1. 2933 MHz memory support in two-DIMMs per-channel (2DPC) configuration can be achieved by using memory purchased from Supermicro. 2. 2933 MHz memory is supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx series) processors only. 3. 6Gb-based memory modules are supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors only.

DIMM Population Guidelines for Optimal Performance

For optimal memory performance, follow the instructions listed in the tables below when populating memory modules.

Key Parameters for DIMM Configuration

Key Parameters for DIMM Configurations
Parameters Possible Values
Number of Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
Number of DIMMs per Channel 1DPC (1 DIMM Per Channel) or 2DPC (2 DIMMs Per Channel)
DIMM Type RDIMM (w/ECC), 3DS RDIMM, LRDIMM, 3DS LRDIMM
DIMM Construction	non-3DS RDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (2Rx4), C (1Rx4), D (1Rx8), E (2Rx8)3DS RDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (4Rx4)non-3DS LRDIMM Raw Cards: D/E (4Rx4)3DS LRDIMM Raw Cards: A/B (8Rx4)

DIMM Mixing Guidelines

General DIMM Mixing Guidelines
DIMM Mixing Rules
All DIMMs must be all DDR4 DIMMs.x4 and x8 DIMMs can be mixed in the same channel.Mixing of LRDIMMs and RDIMMs is not allowed in the same channel, across different channels, and across different sockets.Mixing of non-3DS and 3DS LRDIMM is not allowed in the same channel, across different channels, and across different sockets.
Mixing of DIMM Types within a Channel
DIMM Types RDIMM LRDIMM 3DS LRDIMM
RDIMM Allowed	Not Allowed Not Allowed
LRDIMM	Not Allowed Allowed Not Allowed
3DS LRDIMM	Not Allowed	Not Allowed	Allowed

DIMM Population Table

Note: Unbalanced memory configuration decreases memory performance and is not recommended for Supermicro motherboards.

Memory Population for the the Motherboard (w/24 Slots) based on Intel Xeon Scalable-SP and 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Memory Population Table for the X11DP Motherboard w/24 DIMM Slots Onboard
When 1 CPU is used: Memory Population Sequence
1 CPU & 1 DIMM CPU1: P1-DIMMA1
1 CPU & 2 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1
1 CPU & 3 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1
1 CPU & 4 DIMMs CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 5 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 6 DIMM CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 7 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 8 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1
1 CPU & 9 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 10 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 11 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1
1 CPU & 12 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1
When 2 CPUs are used: Memory Population Sequence
2 CPUs & 2 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMA1CPU2: P2-DIMMA1
2 CPUs & 4 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1CPU2: P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1
2 CPUs & 6 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1
2 CPUs & 8 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 10 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 12 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 14 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 16 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 18 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 20 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME1/P1-DIMMF2/P1-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1
2 CPUs & 22 DIMMs (Unbalanced: not recommended)	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1
2 CPUs & 24 DIMMs	CPU1: P1-DIMMC1/P1-DIMMC2/P1-DIMMB1/P1-DIMMB2/P1-DIMMA1/P1-DIMMA2/P1-DIMMD2/P1-DIMMD1/P1-DIMME2/P1-DIMME2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1CPU2: P2-DIMMC1/P2-DIMMC2/P2-DIMMB1/P2-DIMMB2/P2-DIMMA1/P2-DIMMA2/P2-DIMMD2/P2-DIMMD1/P2-DIMME2/P2-DIMME1/P2-DIMMF1

Note: Please refer to the Memory Configuration User Guide for the X11 UP/DP/MP Motherboards that is posted on our website for detailed information on memory support for this motherboard.

Memory Rank Sparing Tables for the X11DPS-RE (w/24Slots)

Dual Rank Memory Rank Sparing (16GB DIMM)
Memory Population Total RAM Detected
	One Rank Configuration Two Rank Configuration
A1 8GB	8GB
A1+B1 16GB 16GB
A1+B1+C1 24GB 24GB
A1+B1+C1+D1 32GB 32GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1 40GB 40GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1+F1 49GB 49GB
A1+A2 24GB 16GB
A1+A2+B1+B2 48GB 32GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2 72GB 48GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2 96GB 64GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2	120GB 80GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2+F1+F2	144GB 96GB

Quad Rank Memory Rank Sparing (64GB DIMM)
Memory Population Total RAM Detected
	One Rank Configuration Two Rank Configuration
A1 48GB 32GB
A1+B1 96GB 64GB
A1+B1+C1 144GB 96GB
A1+B1+C1+D1 192GB 128GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1 240GB 160GB
A1+B1+C1+D1+E1+F1 288GB 192GB
A1+A2 112GB 96GB
A1+A2+B1+B2 224GB 192GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2 336GB 288GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2 448GB 384GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2	560GB 480GB
A1+A2+B1+B2+C1+C2+D1+D2+E1+E2+F1+F2	672GB 576GB

DCPMM Memory Population Table for the X11DP Motherboards (w/24 Slots) based on 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP Processors

Note: Only 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx/52xx/4215 series) processors support DCPMM memory.

Symmetric Population within 1 CPU Socket

Modes

P1-DIMMF1

P1-DIMMF2

P1-DIMME1

P1-DIMME2

P1-DIMMD1

P1-DIMMD2

P1-DIMMA2

P1-DIMMA1

P1-DIMMB2

P1-DIMMB1

P1-DIMMC2

P1-DIMMC1

Channel Config.

AD

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

2-2-2

MM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

2-2-2

AD + MM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

2-2-2

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-1-1

MM

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

-

DRAM2

2-1-1

AD + MM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

2-1-1

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-2-1

MM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM1

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2-2-1

AD + MM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DCPMM

DRAM3

DCPMM

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

2-2-1

AD

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

MM

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

AD + MM

DCPMM

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

-

DRAM3

-

DRAM3

-

DCPMM

1-1-1

AD

DCPMM

-

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

2-2-1

Asymmetric Population within 1 CPU Socket

Modes

P1-DIMMF1

P1-DIMMF2

P1-DIMME1

P1-DIMME2

P1-DIMMD1

P1-DIMMD2

P1-DIMMA2

P1-DIMMA1

P1-DIMMB2

P1-DIMMB1

P1-DIMMC2

P1-DIMMC1

Channel Config.

AD

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

AD^*

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DCPMM

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

-

DRAM1

2/1-1-1

Legend (for the two tables above)
DDR4 Type					Capacity
DRAM1	RDIMM 3DS	RDIMM LRDIMM	3DS LRDIMM		Refer to Validation Matrix (DDR4 DIMMs validated with DCPMM) below.
DRAM2	RDIMM	-		-
DRAM3	RDIMM 3DS	RDIMM LRDIMM

Note: DDR4 single rank x8 is not available for DCPMM Memory Mode or App-Direct Mode.

Legend (for the first two tables above)
Capacity
DCPMM	Any Capacity (Uniformly for all channels for a given configuration)

• * 2nd socket has no DCPMM DIMM
- Mode definitions: AD=App Direct Mode, MM=Memory Mode, AD+MM=Mixed Mode
- For MM, general DDR4+DCPMM ratio is between 1:4 and 1:16. Excessive capacity for DCPMM can be used for AD.
- For each individual population, rearrangements between channels are allowed as long as the resulting population is compliant with the X11 memory population rules for the 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP processors.
- For each individual population, please use the same DDR4 DIMM in all slots.
- For each individual population, sockets are normally symmetric with exceptions for 1 DCPMM per socket and 1 DCPMM per node case. Currently, DCPMM modules operate at 2666 MHz.
- No mixing of DCPMM and NVMDIMMs within the same platform is allowed.
- This DCPMM population guide targets a balanced DCPMM-to-DRAM-cache ratio in MM and MM + AD modes.

Validation Matrix (DDR4 DIMMs Validated w/DCPMM)
DIMM Type	Ranks Per DIMM & Data Width (Stack)	DIMM Capacity (GB)
		DRAM Density
		4Gb 8Gb
RDIMM	1Rx4 8GB 16GB
	2Rx8 8GB 16GB
	2Rx4 16GB 32GB
LRDIMM 4Rx4 N/A 64GB
LRDIMM 3DS 8Rx4 (4H) N/A 128GB

DIMM Installation

1. Follow the instructions given in the memory population guidelines listed in the previous sections to install memory modules on your motherboard. For the system to work properly, please use memory modules of the same type and speed on the motherboard.

2. Push the release tabs outwards on both ends of the DIMM slot to unlock it.

3. Align the key of the DIMM module with the receptive point on the memory slot.

4. Align the notches on both ends of the module against the receptive points on the ends of the slot.

5. Use two thumbs together to press on both ends of the module straight down into the slot until the module snaps into place.

6. Press the release tabs to the lock positions to secure the DIMM module into the slot.

Exploded view of a computer motherboard showing CPU socket, RAM slots, and drive bays (no text or labels visible)

Release Tabs Notches

DIMM Module Removal

Press the release tabs on both ends of the DIMM socket to release the DIMM module from the socket as shown in the drawing below.

Diagram of a mechanical component with blue directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Warnings: 1. Please do not use excessive force when pressing the release tabs on the ends of the DIMM socket to avoid causing any damage to the DIMM module or the DIMM socket. 2. Please handle DIMM modules with care. Carefully follow all the instructions given on Page 1 of this chapter to prevent ESD-related damages to your memory modules or components.

2.5 Rear I/O Ports

See the figure below for the locations and descriptions of the various I/O ports on the rear of the motherboard.

JPM1 JPM2 JPM3 JPM4 JPM5 JPM6 JPM7 JPM8 JPM9 JPM10 JPM11 JPM12 JPM13 JPM14 JPM15 JPM16 JPM17 JPM18 JPM19 JPM20 JPM21 JPM22 JPM23 JPM24 JPM25 JPM26 JPM27 JPM28 JPM29 JPM30 JPM31 JPM32 JPM33 JPM34 JPM35 JPM36 JPM37 JPM38 JPM39 JPM40 JPM41 JPM42 JPM43 JPM44 JPM45 JPM46 JPM47 JPM48 JPM49 JPM50 JPM51 JPM52 JPM53 JPM54 JPM55 JPM56 JPM57 JPM58 JPM59 JPM60 JPM61 JPM62 JPM63 JPM64 JPM65 JPM66 JPM67 JPM68 JPM69 JPM70 JPM71 JPM72 JPM73 JPM74 JPM75 JPM76 JPM77 JPM78 JPM79 JPM80 JPM81 JPM82 JPM83 JPM84 JPM85 JPM86 JPM87 JPM88 JPM89 JPM90 JPM91 JPM92 JPM93 JPM94 JPM95 JPM96 JPM97 JPM98 JPM99 JPM100 SUPER® X11DPS-RE Rev1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FSC CE FCS 2000/2001/2002/2003/2004/2005/2006/2007/2008/2009/2010/2011/2012/2013/2014/2015/2016/2017/2018/2019/2020/2021/2022/2023/2024/2025/2026/2027/2028/2029/2030/2031/2032/2033/2034/2035/2036/2037/2038/2039/2040/2041/2042/2043/2044/2045/2046/2047/2048/2049/2050/2051/2052/2053/2054/2055/2056/2057/2058/2059/2060/2061/2062/2063/2064/2065/2066/2067/2068/2069/2070/2071/2072/2073/2074/2075/2076/2077/2078/2079/2080/2081/2082/2083/2084/2085/2086/2087/2088/2089/2090/21

Diagram showing eight labeled electronic ports with corresponding logos and numbers, likely representing a network or port configuration.

Back Panel I/O Ports
No.	Description	No.	Description
1.	Unit Identifier Switch (JUIDB2)	5.	USB13 (3.0)
2.	COM1 (JCOM1)	6.	LAN Port1 (JLAN1)
3.	IPMI_LAN	7.	LAN Port2 (JLAN2)
4.	USB12 (3.0)	8.	VGA

Serial (COM) Ports

There are two COM connectors (JCOM1/JCOM2) in your system. COM Port 1 (JCOM1) is located on the I/O backplane, and COM Port 2 (JCOM2) is located next to the IO backplane on the motherboard. These COM connectors provide serial communication support. See the layout below for the locations of COM ports.

VGA Port

There is one VGA port on the IO back panel. Connect a VGA cable to this port for the video display.

1. JCOM1 2. JCOM2 3. JVGA 3 1 2 SUPER® X11DPS-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 CPU2 RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots RAM slots

Universal Serial Bus (USB) Ports

There are two USB 3.0 ports (USB12/13) on the I/O back panel located at JUSB1.

Back Panel USB 12/13 (3.0) Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition	Pin#	Definition
A1	VBUS	B1	Power
A2	D-	B2	USB_N
A3	D+	B3	USB_P
A4	GND	B4	GND
A5	Stda_SSRX-	B5	USB3_RN
A6	Stda_SSRX+B6	USB3_RP
A7	GND	B7	GND
A8	Stda_SSTX-	B8	USB3_TN
A9	Stda_SSTX+	B9	USB3_TP

1. USB12 (3.0) 2. USB13 (3.0) 1 2 1 1. 2 1 SUPER® X11DP5-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 CPU2 FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMA FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMC FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMB FANUMC

LAN Ports 1/2

Two 10G LAN ports (JLAN1, JLAN2) are located on the I/O back panel. These ports accept RJ45 type cables.

IPMI\_LAN Port

An IPMI-dedicated LAN that supports GbE LAN is located on the backplane. Please refer to the LED Indicator Section for LAN LED information.

1. LAN Port 1 (JLAN1) 2. LAN Port 2 (JLAN2) 3 2 1 IPMI_LAN SP1 IPL1 VGA JLAN2 JLAN1 JUPWLAN ICOM1 LCD1 JUDB2 JCP01 JCP02 S SATA4 - SATAS LED5 M2 20 M2 21 PC22/PC21 JPG JPGR1 JPGR2 JPGR1 CPU S LOPS LED5 CPU SUPT PLE-LED5 JST1 BT1 JPL1 SUPER X11DPS-RIE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FCE CE PSU2 PSU1 CPU1 CPU2 FANTFANS FANCFANS FAN3FAN1 FANTFANS BOS LICENSE

2.6 Front Control Panel

JF1 contains header pins for various buttons and indicators that are normally located on a control panel at the front of the chassis. These connectors are designed specifically for use with Supermicro chassis. See the figure below for the descriptions of the front control panel buttons and LED indicators.

SUPER® X10PS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 CPU2 GPIO1 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO4 GPIO5 GPIO6 GPIO7 GPIO8 GPIO9 GPIO10 GPIO11 GPIO12 GPIO13 GPIO14 GPIO15 GPIO16 GPIO17 GPIO18 GPIO19 GPIO20 GPIO21 GPIO22 GPIO23 GPIO24 GPIO25 GPIO26 GPIO27 GPIO28 GPIO29 GPIO30 GPIO31 GPIO32 GPIO33 GPIO34 GPIO35 GPIO36 GPIO37 GPIO38 GPIO39 GPIO40 GPIO41 GPIO42 GPIO43 GPIO44 GPIO45 GPIO46 GPIO47 GPIO48 GPIO49 GPIO50 GPIO51 GPIO52 GPIO53 GPIO54 GPIO55 GPIO56 GPIO57 GPIO58 GPIO59 GPIO60 GPIO61 GPIO62 GPIO63 GPIO64 GPIO65 GPIO66 GPIO67 GPIO68 GPIO69 GPIO70 GPIO71 GPIO72 GPIO73 GPIO74 GPIO75 GPIO76 GPIO77 GPIO78 GPIO79 GPIO80 GPIO81 GPIO82 GPIO83 GPIO84 GPIO85 GPIO86 GPIO87 GPIO88 GPIO89 GPIO90 GPIO91 GPIO92 GPIO93 GPIO94 GPIO95 GPIO96 GPIO97 GPIO98 GPIO99 GPIO100

JF1 Header Pins

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 1 2 Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED

Power Button

The Power Button connection is located on pins 1 and 2 of JF1. Momentarily contacting both pins will power on/off the system. This button can also be configured to function as a suspend button (with a setting in the BIOS - see Chapter 4). To turn off the power when the system is in suspend mode, press the button for 4 seconds or longer. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power ButtonPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

1 Signal

2 Ground

Reset Button

The Reset Button connection is located on pins 3 and 4 of JF1. Attach it to a hardware reset switch on the computer case to reset the system. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Reset ButtonPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

3 Reset

4 Ground

1 2 ① Power Button Ground ② Reset Button Ground 3.3V Power Fail LED UID LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED 3.3V Stby NIC2 Active LED 3.3V Stby NIC1 Active LED 3.3V Stby HDD LED 3.3V PWR LED

1. PWR Button

2. Reset Button

Power Fail LED

The Power Fail LED connection is located on pins 5 and 6 of JF1. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power Fail LEDPin Definitions (JF1)
Pin#	Definition
5	3.3V
6	PWR Supply Fail

OH/Fan Fail/PWR Fail/UID LED

Connect an LED cable to pins 7 and 8 of the Front Control Panel (JF1) to use UID/Overheat/Fan Fail/Power Fail LED connections. The LED on pin 8 provides warnings of overheat, power failure or fan failure. Refer to the tables below for details.

Information LED-UID/OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED Pin Definitions (Pin 7 & Pin 8 of JF1)
Status Description
Solid red An overheat condition has occurred. (This may be caused by cable congestion).
Blinking red (1Hz) Fan failure: check for an inoperative fan.
Blinking red (0.25Hz) Power failure: check for a non-operational power supply
Solid blue Local UID is activated. Use this function to locate a unit in a rack mount environment that might be in need of service.
Blinking blue (300 msec)	Remote UID is on. Use this function to identify a unit from a remote location that might be in need of service.

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 1 2 Ground Ground Power Fail LED① OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED② NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED

1. Power Fail LED
2. UID/OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED

The NIC (Network Interface Controller) LED connection for LAN port 1 is located on pins 11 and 12 of JF1, and LAN port 2 is on pins 9 and 10. Attach the NIC LED cables here to display network activity. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

LAN1/LAN2 LEDPin Definitions (JF1)

Pin# Definition Pin# Definition

9 +3.3V 10 NIC 2 Activity LED

11 +3.3V 12 NIC 1 Activity LED

HDD LED

The HDD LED connection is located on pins 13 and 14 of JF1. Attach a cable to pin 14 to show hard drive activity status. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

HDD LEDPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

13 3.3V Stdby

14 HDD Active

1 2 Power Button ○ ○ Ground Reset Button ○ ○ Ground 3.3V ○ ○ Power Fail LED UID LED ○ ○ OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED 3.3V Stby ○ ○ NIC2 Active LED ① 3.3V Stby ○ ○ NIC1 Active LED ② 3.3V Stby ○ ○ HDD LED ③ 3.3V ○ ○ PWR LED 1. NIC2 LED 2. NIC1 LED 3. HDD LED

Unit Identifier Switch/UID LED Indicator

A Unit Identifier (UID) switch and a rear UID LED (LED1) are located on the I/O back panel. A front UID switch is located on pins 7 & 8 of the front panel control (JF1). When you press the front or the rear UID switch, both front and rear UID LEDs will be turned on. Press the UID switch again to turn off the LED indicators. The UID indicators provide easy identification of a system that may be in need of service. (Note: UID can also be triggered via IPMI on the motherboard. For more information, please refer to the IPMI User's Guide posted on our website at http://www.supermicro.com.)

UID Switch Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground
2	Ground
3	Button In
4	Button In

UID LEDPin Definitions

Color Status

Blue: On Unit Identified

1. UID (JUIDB2)
2. (Rear) UID LED (LED1)
3. (Front( UID LED

Power LED

The Power LED connection is located on pins 15 and 16 of JF1. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Power LEDPin Definitions (JF1)

Pins Definition

15 3.3V

16 PWR LED

Power Button Reset Button 3.3V UID LED 3.3V Stby 3.3V Stby 3.3V Ground Ground Power Fail LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED NIC2 Active LED NIC1 Active LED HDD LED PWR LED ①

1. PWR LED

2.7 Connectors

Power Connectors

SMCI-Proprietary Power Connectors

Two SMCI-proprietary Power Supply Unit connectors, located at PSU1/PSU2, provide main power to your system. Please note that these power connectors are reserved for Supermicro system use only.

PCIe-Proprietary Power Connectors

JPWR1/2 are 12-pin power connectors designed for proprietary PCIE-based backplane memory use. Connect appropriate power cables here to provide power to your PCIe devices.

12V 8-pin Power Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1 - 6	Ground
7 - 12	+12V

1. PSU1 2. PSU2 3. JPWR1 4. JPWR2 3 4 SUPER X11DPS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 CPU2 FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG FANIPAN FANIPANG

Headers

Onboard Fan Header

This motherboard has eight headers (FAN1\~8). All these 4-pin fan headers are backward-compatible with traditional 3-pin fans. However, onboard fan speed control is available only when all 4-pin fans are used on the motherboard. Onboard fan speeds are controlled by thermal management via the BMC (or by IPMI). See the table below for pin definitions.

Fan HeaderPin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground (Black)
2	+12V (Red)
3	Tachometer
4	PWM Control

1. FAN 1
2. FAN 2
3. FAN 3
4. FAN 4
5. FAN 5
6. FAN 6
7. FAN 7
8. FAN 8

TPM Header

The Trusted Platform Module (TPM)/Port 80 is located at JTPM1 and is available from SMCI (optional). A TPM/Port 80 connector is a security device that supports encryption and authentication in hard drives. It allows the motherboard to deny access if the TPM associated with the hard drive is not installed in the system. See the table below for pin definitions.

TPM/Port 80 HeaderPin Definitions
Pin #	Definition	Pin #	Definition
1	+3.3V	2	SPI_CS#
3	RESET#	4	SPI_MISO
5	SPI_CLK	6	GND
7	SPI_MOSI	8
9	+3.3V Stdby	10	SPI_IRQ

1. TPM/Port 80 Head 1. SUPER X11DPS-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA LAN/LAN/LAN/LAN JCP1 JCP2 JCP3 JCP4 JCP5 JCP6 JCP7 JCP8 JCP9 JCP10 JCP11 JCP12 JCP13 JCP14 JCP15 JCP16 JCP17 JCP18 JCP19 JCP20 JCP21 JCP22 JCP23 JCP24 JCP25 JCP26 JCP27 JCP28 JCP29 JCP30 JCP31 JCP32 JCP33 JCP34 JCP35 JCP36 JCP37 JCP38 JCP39 JCP40 JCP41 JCP42 JCP43 JCP44 JCP45 JCP46 JCP47 JCP48 JCP49 JCP50 JCP51 JCP52 JCP53 JCP54 JCP55 JCP56 JCP57 JCP58 JCP59 JCP60 JCP61 JCP62 JCP63 JCP64 JCP65 JCP66 JCP67 JCP68 JCP69 JCP70 JCP71 JCP72 JCP73 JCP74 JCP75 JCP76 JCP77 JCP78 JCP79 JCP80 JCP81 JCP82 JCP83 JCP84 JCP85 JCP86 JCP87 JCP88 JCP89 JCP90 JCP91 JCP92 JCP93 JCP94 JCP95 JCP96 JCP97 JCP98 JCP99 JCP100

VROC RAID Key Header

A VROC RAID Key header is located at JRK1 on the motherboard. Install a VROC RAID Key on JRK1 for NVMe RAID support as shown in the illustration below. Please refer to the layout below for the location of JRK1.

Intel VROC Key Pin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Ground
2	3.3V Standby
3	Ground
4	PCH RAID Key

Isometric diagram showing a device with a green arrow pointing to a terminal block, overlaid on a cityscape background (no text or symbols)

1. VROC RAID Key 1 SPT JUN2 JUN1 VGA JLAN2 JLANT LPD4 JCOM1 LE5 S-SAT445-SAT45 ALLD3 JL2 211 JND2RD1 JUN2 JUN1 JUN0 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR1 PWR2 PWR3 FENZIAN8-FANZIAN6 FENZIAN8-FANZIAN6 FENZIAN8-FANZIAN6 FENZIAN8-FANZIAN6

Chassis Intrusion

A Chassis Intrusion header is located at JL1 on the motherboard. Connect an appropriate cable from JL1 to the chassis so that you can be informed of a chassis intrusion (via IPMI). Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Chassis Intrusion Pin Definitions
Pin# Definition
1	Intrusion Input
2	Ground

1. Chassis Intrusion JUD82 JUD91 JUD92 JUD93 JUD94 JUD95 JUD96 JUD97 JUD98 JUD99 JUD100 JUD101 JUD102 JUD103 JUD104 JUD105 JUD106 JUD107 JUD108 JUD109 JUD110 JUD111 JUD112 JUD113 JUD114 JUD115 JUD116 JUD117 JUD118 JUD119 JUD120 JUD121 JUD122 JUD123 JUD124 JUD125 JUD126 JUD127 JUD128 JUD129 JUD130 JUD131 JUD132 JUD133 JUD134 JUD135 JUD136 JUD137 JUD138 JUD139 JUD140 JUD141 JUD142 JUD143 JUD144 JUD145 JUD146 JUD147 JUD148 JUD149 JUD150 JUD151 JUD152 JUD153 JUD154 JUD155 JUD156 JUD157 JUD158 JUD159 JUD160 JUD161 JUD162 JUD163 JUD164 JUD165 JUD166 JUD167 JUD168 JUD169 JUD170 JUD171 JUD172 JUD173 JUD174 JUD175 JUD176 JUD177 JUD178 JUD179 JUD180 JUD181 JUD182 JUD183 JUD184 JUD185 JUD186 JUD187 JUD188 JUD189 JUD190 JUD191 JUD192 JUD193 JUD194 JUD195 JUD196 JUD197 JUD198 JUD199 JUD200 JUD201 JUD202 JUD203 JUD204 JUD205 JUD206 JUD207 JUD208 JUD209 JUD210 JUD211 JUD212 JUD213 JUD214 JUD215 JUD216 JUD217 JUD218 JUD219 JUD220 SUSPERX X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NVMe Slots (PCIe 3.0 x32)

There are two PCIe 3.0 x32 slots with Tray Cable Connector Interface support on the motherboard. These slots offer 32 NVMe connections which support 36 drives (32 NVMe NF1 + 4 SATA3 M.2).

1. CPU1 PCIe 3.0 x32 2. CPU2 PCIe 3.0 x32 1. 2. SUPER X11DPS-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FC CE CPU1 CPU2 FANZFAN8 FANZFAN6 FANZFAN4 FANTIAN2 HOS LICENSE

PCIe 3.0 Slots

There are two PCIe 3.0 x16 slots located on the motherboard. CPU1 SLOT1 PCIe and CPU2 SLOT2 PCIe are supported by their corresponding CPU's, and offer riser card support.

Note: To avoid causing interference with other components, please be sure to use an add-on card that is fully compliant with the PCI-standard on a PCI slot.

1. CPU1 SLOT1 PCIe 3.0 2. CPU2 SLOT2 PCIe 3.0 SP1 JPL1 VCA JLAN2 JLAN1 JUSB1 USB12/TSD1 JPMILAN JCOM1 LED1 JUD32 JCOM2 JP-SCAN_BMC_JPE2 JP-SCAN_BMC_JPE2 JP-SCAN_BMC_JPE2 JUN1 JUN2 JUN1 JUN4 S-SATA45-SATA5 JFD3 M2_JB1 SD2/SD1 JP-PS JPT1 JP-PS JPT1 JPT1 LE1 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE15 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE10 LE12 LE12 LPGK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPK/SIPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PSPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PFPkS/PF#P# FC# CE X: 1DPS-RE REV: 1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FSU2 FSU1 FAMCODE FAMFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANFSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FANSFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFNGFANG FAN SFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFG NFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNFGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLG NAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNAFLGNA FLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLAFLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA FLA

PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 Slots

The X11DPS-RE motherboard has two PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 slots: J30 (SLOT1) and J31 (SLOT2). M.2 was formerly Next Generation Form Factor (NGFF) and serves to replace mini PCIe. M.2 allows for a variety of card sizes, increased functionality, and spatial efficiency. The M.2 sockets on the motherboard support PCIe 3.0 X4 (32 Gb/s) SSD cards in the 2260, 2280 and 22110 form factors.

A Holder Locked position B Holder Mount Turn 80 degrees to lock Locked position C Card Holder Mount Turn 90 degrees to lock Locked position D Plastic screw STOP Press in here Rectangle hole on MB Hole Location on the MB 42 M.2 Card 60 A+B+C M.2 Card 80 A+B+C M.2 Card 110 A+B+D A+B+C A B+D Copyright © 2017 by Super-More Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.

1. PCIe/SATA Hyb 2. PCIe/SATA Hyb 1 2 SUPER X11DPS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 PCI8 PCI9 PCI10 PCI11 PCI12 PCI13 PCI14 PCI15 PCI16 PCI17 PCI18 PCI19 PCI20 PCI21 PCI22 PCI23 PCI24 PCI25 PCI26 PCI27 PCI28 PCI29 PCI30 PCI31 PCI32 PCI33 PCI34 PCI35 PCI36 PCI37 PCI38 PCI39 PCI40 PCI41 PCI42 PCI43 PCI44 PCI45 PCI46 PCI47 PCI48 PCI49 PCI50

1. PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 SLOT 1 (J30)

2. PCIe/SATA Hybrid M.2 SLOT 2 (J31)

S-SATA 3.0 Ports

The X11DPS-RE has two SATA DOM 3.0 ports (S-SATA4, S-SATA5). S-SATA4/S-SATA5 can be used with Supermicro SuperDOMs which are yellow SATA DOM connectors with power pins built in, and do not require external power cables. Supermicro SuperDOMs are backward-compatible with regular SATA HDDs or SATA DOMs that need external power cables. All these SATA ports provide serial-link signal connections, which are faster than the connections of Parallel ATA.

SATA 3.0 Port Pin Definitions
Pin#	Signal
1	Ground
2	SATA_TXP
3	SATA_TXN
4	Ground
5	SATA_RXN
6	SATA_RXP
7	Ground

1. S-SATA4 2. S-SATA5 S-T JPL1 VGA JUN2 JUN1 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN1 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10 JUN10

2.8 Jumper Settings

How Jumpers Work

Jumpers are used to modify the operation of the motherboard by creating shorts between two pins to change the function of the connector. In this case, jumpers can be used to choose between optional settings. Pin 1 is identified with a square solder pad on the printed circuit board. See the diagram at right for an example of jumping pins 1 and 2. Refer to the motherboard layout page for jumper locations.

Note: On two-pin jumpers, "Closed" means the jumper is on and "Open" means the jumper is off the pins.

Connector Pins Jumper Setting 3 2 1 3 2 1

CMOS Clear

JBT1 is used to clear CMOS and will also clear any passwords. Instead of pins, this jumper consists of contact pads to prevent accidentally clearing the contents of CMOS.

To Clear CMOS

1. First power down the system and unplug the power cord(s).
2. Remove the cover of the chassis to access the motherboard.
3. Remove the onboard battery from the motherboard.
4. Short the CMOS pads with a metal object such as a small screwdriver for at least four seconds.
5. Remove the screwdriver (or shorting device).
6. Replace the cover, reconnect the power cord(s), and power on the system.

Note: Clearing CMOS will also clear all passwords.

Do not use the PW_ON connector to clear CMOS.

JBT1 contact pads

1. Clear CMO 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

1. Clear CMOS

Internal Speaker/Buzzer

The Internal Speaker/Buzzer (SP1) is used to provide audible indications for various beep codes. Refer to the table below for pin definitions.

Internal BuzzerPin Definitions
Pin#	Definition
1	Pos (+)	Beep In
2	Neg (-)	Alarm Speaker

1. Internal Speaker 1. SP1 JPL1 VGA JL4N2 JL4N1 JCOM1 LED3 JCOM2 JUPMILAN JSDS1 USX12: 80.00 LED4 M.2 5-SATA15-SATA5 LED3 V2 J51 JSD2/SD1 JPWR2 JPT1 GT1 JPMC1 JPMR1 CPU1 CPU2 FANTFANG TANSTANG FANTFANG TANSTANG FANTFANG PSU2 PSU1 FECK/AM 600/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/700/69 SUPERO X11DPS-RE REX1.01 DESIGNED IN USA

Management Engine (ME) Recovery

Use jumper JPME1 to select ME Firmware Recovery mode, which will limit resource allocation for essential system operation only in order to maintain normal power operation and management. In the single operation mode, online upgrade will be available via ME Recovery mode. See the table below for jumper settings.

ME Recovery ModeJumper Settings
Jumper Setting Definition
Pins 1-2 Normal	(Default)
Pins 2-3 ME Recovery

1. ME Recovery JUDE2 JCOM1 LED4 JUNX3 S SATAS SATAS MLED3 JSD2JSD1 JPMPS JCPW2 JPWR2 JCM2 USB 2/18/3.0 USB1 JAN2 JAN1 LED4 JPN1 JPN3 JPN5 JPN7 JPN9 JPN10 JPN11 JPN12 JPN13 JPN14 JPN15 JPN16 JPN17 JPN18 JPN19 JPN20 JPN21 JPN22 JPN23 JPN24 JPN25 JPN26 JPN27 JPN28 JPN29 JPN30 JPN31 JPN32 JPN33 JPN34 JPN35 JPN36 JPN37 JPN38 JPN39 JPN40 JPN41 JPN42 JPN43 JPN44 JPN45 JPN46 JPN47 JPN48 JPN49 JPN50 JPN51 JPN52 JPN53 JPN54 JPN55 JPN56 JPN57 JPN58 JPN59 JPN60 JPN61 JPN62 JPN63 JPN64 JPN65 JPN66 JPN67 JPN68 JPN69 JPN70 JPN71 JPN72 JPN73 JPN74 JPN75 JPN76 JPN77 JPN78 JPN79 JPN80 JPN81 JPN82 JPN83 JPN84 JPN85 JPN86 JPN87 JPN88 JPN89 JPN90 JPN91 JPN92 JPN93 JPN94 JPN95 JPN96 JPN97 JPN98 JPN99 FCSU2 FSU3 CPU11 DIPS-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU2 FAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFAX:FBFC

Manufacturing Mode Select

Close JPME2 to bypass SPI flash security and force the system to use the Manufacturing Mode, which will allow you to flash the system firmware from a host server to modify system settings. See the table below for jumper settings.

Manufacturing Mode SelectJumper Settings
Jumper Setting Definition
Pins 1-2 Normal	(Default)
Pins 2-3 Manufacturing Mode

1. Manufacturing Mode Select JSPWR1 JPLT VGA JUS81 USB21 NER JPMILAN XOM1 LED1 JUDR2 JPM1 JPM7 LED4 S SAT605 M T45 LED1 M2 J31 JCD2JG01 JCPW1 JPM1 JPM7 CPU 5.01 PC 3.015 LED1 CPU 5.012 FC 5.016 JST1 JPM2 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM7 JPM10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 SUPER® X11DPS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA FCC CE CPU1 CPU2 FANTFAM FANTFAM6 FANTFAM FANTFAM6 FANTFAM FANTFAM6

Watch Dog Timer Jumper

Jumper JWD1 controls the function of Watch Dog timer. Watch Dog timer is a monitor that can reboot the system when a software application hangs. Closing pins 1-2 will cause Watch Dog to reset the system if an application hangs. Closing pins 2-3 will generate a non-maskable interrupt signal for the application that hangs. For this jumper to work properly, this feature must also be enabled in BIOS. The default setting is Reset.

Note: When Watch Dog is enabled, the user needs to write their own application software to disable it.

Watch DogJumper Settings
Jumper Setting	Definition
Pins 1-2	Reset
Pins 2-3	NMI
Open	Disabled

1. Watch Dog Jumper 1 JUOD2 JUOD1 JUOD3 JUOD4 JUOD5 JUOD6 JUOD7 JUOD8 JUOD9 JUOD10 JUOD11 JUOD12 JUOD13 JUOD14 JUOD15 JUOD16 JUOD17 JUOD18 JUOD19 JUOD20 JUOD21 JUOD22 JUOD23 JUOD24 JUOD25 JUOD26 JUOD27 JUOD28 JUOD29 JUOD30 JUOD31 JUOD32 JUOD33 JUOD34 JUOD35 JUOD36 JUOD37 JUOD38 JUOD39 JUOD40 JUOD41 JUOD42 JUOD43 JUOD44 JUOD45 JUOD46 JUOD47 JUOD48 JUOD49 JUOD50 JUOD51 JUOD52 JUOD53 JUOD54 JUOD55 JUOD56 JUOD57 JUOD58 JUOD59 JUOD60 JUOD61 JUOD62 JUOD63 JUOD64 JUOD65 JUOD66 JUOD67 JUOD68 JUOD69 JUOD70 JUOD71 JUOD72 JUOD73 JUOD74 JUOD75 JUOD76 JUOD77 JUOD78 JUOD79 JUOD80 JUOD81 JUOD82 JUOD83 JUOD84 JUOD85 JUOD86 JUOD87 JUOD88 JUOD89 JUOD90 JUOD91 JUOD92 JUOD93 JUOD94 JUOD95 JUOD96 JUOD97 JUOD98 JUOD99 JUOD100

2.9 LED Indicators

IPMI-Dedicated LAN LEDs

An IPMI-dedicated LAN is located on the I/O Backplane of the motherboard. The amber LED on the right indicates activity, while the green LED on the left indicates the speed of the connection. See the tables at right for more information.

IPMI_LAN Link LED (Left) & Activity LED (Right)
Color	State	Definition
Link (Left) Green: Solid 100 Mbps
Activity (Right)	Amber: Blinking	Active

IPMI_LAN Link LED Activity LED

1. IPMI_LAN LEDs 1 1 SUPER XI1DPS-RE REV3.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 PANIFANG PANIFANG CPU2 PANIFANG FASIFANG JCM1 LED4 M2 LED3 M2 M2 JX025C1 JX025C2 JX025C3 JX025C4 JX025C5 JX025C6 JX025C7 JX025C8 JX025C9 JX025C10 JX025C11 JX025C12 JX025C13 JX025C14 JX025C15 JX025C16 JX025C17 JX025C18 JX025C19 JX025C20 JX025C21 JX025C22 JX025C23 JX025C24 JX025C25 JX025C26 JX025C27 JX025C28 JX025C29 JX025C30 JX025C31 JX025C32 JX025C33 JX025C34 JX025C35 JX025C36 JX025C37 JX025C38 JX025C39 JX025C40 JX025C41 JX025C42 JX025C43 JX025C44 JX025C45 JX025C46 JX025C47 JX025C48 JX025C49 JX025C50 JX025C51 JX025C52 JX025C53 JX025C54 JX025C55 JX025C56 JX025C57 JX025C58 JX025C59 JX025C60 JX025C61 JX025C62 JX025C63 JX025C64 JX025C65 JX025C66 JX025C67 JX025C68 JX025C69 JX025C70 JX025C71 JX025C72 JX025C73 JX025C74 JX025C75 JX025C76 JX025C77 JX025C78 JX025C79 JX025C80 JX025C81 JX025C82 JX025C83 JX025C84 JX025C85 JX025C86 JX025C87 JX025C88 JX025C89 JX025C90 JX025C91 JX025C92 JX025C93 JX025C94 JX025C95 JX025C96 JX025C97 JX025C98 JX025C99 JX025C100

BMC Heartbeat LED

LEDM1 is the BMC heartbeat LED. When the LED is blinking green, BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) is functioning normally. See the table below for the LED status.

Onboard Power LED Indicator
LED Color Definition
Green:Blinking	BMC Normal

Onboard Power LED

The Onboard Power LED is located at LE2 on the motherboard. When this LED is on, the system is also on. Be sure to turn off the system and unplug the power cord before removing or installing components. Refer to the table below for more information.

Onboard Power LED Indicator
LED Color Definition
Off	System Power Off(power cable not connected)
Green System Power On

1. BMC Heartbeat L 2. Onboard Power L SPT JPL1 VGA JLX2 JLX1 JLX4 JLX3 JLX2 JLX1 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX0 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX1 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX2 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX3 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX4 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLX5 JLx5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/50/51/52/53/54/55/56/57/58/59/60/61/62/63/64/65/66/67/68/69/70/71/72/73/74/75/76/77/78/79/80/81/82/83/84/85/86/87/88/89/90/91/92/93/94/95/96/97/98/99/100/ SUPPER® X11DPS-RE REV:1.01 DESIGNED IN USA

Unit Identifier (UID) LED

A rear UID LED indicator at LED1 is located next to the UID switch on the I/O back panel. The front UID LED is located at pins 7 and 8 on the front control panel. The UID indicators provide easy identification of a system unit that may need service.

UID LEDLED Indicator
LED Color Definition
Blue: On Unit	Identified

UID SWITCH UID LED

1. Rear UID LED 2. Front UID LED 1 LED2 Power Button Ground Reset Button Ground 3.3V Power Fail LED 2 ID LED OH/PWR Fail/Fan Fail LED 3.3V Stby NIC2 Active LED 3.3V Stby NIC1 Active LED 3.3V Stby HDD LED 3.3V Stby PWR LED Super X10PS-RE REV1.01 DESIGNED IN USA CPU1 CPU2 LANLANSI/ANLANSI LANLANSI/ANLANSI LANLANSI/ANLANSI LANLANSI/ANLANSI LANLANSI/ANLANSI

Chapter 3

Troubleshooting

3.1 Troubleshooting Procedures

Use the following procedures to troubleshoot your system. If you have followed all of the procedures below and still need assistance, refer to the 'Technical Support Procedures' and/or 'Returning Merchandise for Service' section(s) in this chapter. Always disconnect the AC power cord before adding, changing or installing any non hot-swap hardware components.

Before Power On

1. Check that the power LED on the motherboard is on.
2. Make sure that the power connector is connected to your power supply.
3. Make sure that no short circuits exist between the motherboard and chassis.
4. Disconnect all cables from the motherboard, including those for the keyboard and mouse.
5. Remove all add-on cards.
6. Install a CPU, a heatsink*, and connect the internal speaker and the power LED to the motherboard. Check all jumper settings as well. (Make sure that the heatsink is fully seated.)
7. Use the correct type of onboard CMOS battery as recommended by the manufacturer. To avoid possible explosion, do not install the CMOS battery upside down.

No Power

1. Make sure that no short circuits exist between the motherboard and the chassis.
2. Verify that all jumpers are set to their default positions.
3. Check that the 115V/230V switch on the power supply is properly set.
4. Turn the power switch on and off to test the system.
5. The battery on your motherboard may be old. Check to verify that it still supplies \~3VDC. If it does not, replace it with a new one.

No Video

1. If the power is on but you have no video, remove all the add-on cards and cables.
2. Use the speaker to determine if any beep codes exist. Refer to Appendix A for details on beep codes.

System Boot Failure

If the system does not display POST (Power-On-Self-Test) or does not respond after the power is turned on, check the following:

1. Check for any error beep from the motherboard speaker.

2. If there is no error beep, try to turn on the system without DIMM modules installed. If there is still no error beep, replace the motherboard.

3. If there are error beeps, clear the CMOS settings by unplugging the power cord and contacting both pads on the CMOS Clear Jumper (JBT1). Refer to chapter 2.
4. Remove all components from the motherboard, especially the DIMM modules. Make sure that system power is on and that memory error beeps are activated.
5. Turn on the system with only one DIMM module installed. If the system boots, check for bad DIMM modules or slots by following the Memory Errors Troubleshooting procedure in this Chapter.

Memory Errors

1. Make sure that the DIMM modules are properly and fully installed.
2. Confirm that you are using the correct memory. Also, it is recommended that you use the same memory type and speed for all DIMMs in the system. See Section 2.4 for memory details.
3. Check for bad DIMM modules or slots by swapping modules between slots and noting the results.
4. Check the power supply voltage 115V/230V switch.

Losing the System's Setup Configuration

1. Make sure that you are using a high quality power supply. A poor quality power supply may cause the system to lose the CMOS setup information. Refer to Section 1.6 for details on recommended power supplies.
2. The battery on your motherboard may be old. Check to verify that it still supplies \~3VDC. If it does not, replace it with a new one.
3. If the above steps do not fix the setup configuration problem, contact your vendor for repairs.

When the System Becomes Unstable

A. If the system becomes unstable during or after OS installation, check the following:

1. CPU/BIOS support: Make sure that your CPU is supported and that you have the latest BIOS installed in your system.

2. Memory support: Make sure that the memory modules are supported by testing the modules using memtest86 or a similar utility.

Note: Refer to the product page on our website at http://www.supermicro.com for memory and CPU support and updates.

1. HDD support: Make sure that all hard disk drives (HDDs) work properly. Replace the bad HDDs with good ones.
2. System cooling: Check the system cooling to make sure that all heatsink fans and CPU/system fans, etc., work properly. Check the hardware monitoring settings in the IPMI to make sure that the CPU and system temperatures are within the normal range. Also check the front panel Overheat LED and make sure that it is not on.
3. Adequate power supply: Make sure that the power supply provides adequate power to the system. Make sure that all power connectors are connected. Please refer to our website for more information on the minimum power requirements.
4. Proper software support: Make sure that the correct drivers are used.

B. If the system becomes unstable before or during OS installation, check the following:

1. Source of installation: Make sure that the devices used for installation are working properly, including boot devices such as CD.

2. Cable connection: Check to make sure that all cables are connected and working properly.

3. Using the minimum configuration for troubleshooting: Remove all unnecessary components (starting with add-on cards first), and use the minimum configuration (but with a CPU and a memory module installed) to identify the trouble areas. Refer to the steps listed in Section A above for proper troubleshooting procedures.

4. Identifying bad components by isolating them: If necessary, remove a component in question from the chassis, and test it in isolation to make sure that it works properly. Replace a bad component with a good one.
5. Check and change one component at a time instead of changing several items at the same time. This will help isolate and identify the problem.
6. To find out if a component is good, swap this component with a new one to see if the system will work properly. If so, then the old component is bad. You can also install the component in question in another system. If the new system works, the component is good and the old system has problems.

3.2 Technical Support Procedures

Before contacting Technical Support, please take the following steps. Also, note that as a motherboard manufacturer, we do not sell directly to end-users, so it is best to first check with your distributor or reseller for troubleshooting services. They should know of any possible problem(s) with the specific system configuration that was sold to you.

1. Please review the 'Troubleshooting Procedures' and 'Frequently Asked Questions' (FAQs) sections in this chapter or see the FAQs on our website before contacting Technical Support.
2. BIOS upgrades can be downloaded from our website. Note: Not all BIOS can be flashed depending on the modifications to the boot block code.

3. If you still cannot resolve the problem, include the following information when contacting us for technical support:

4. Motherboard model and PCB revision number

5. BIOS release date/version (this can be seen on the initial display when your system first boots up)
6. System configuration

An example of a Technical Support form is posted on our website.

Distributors: For immediate assistance, please have your account number ready when contacting our technical support department by e-mail.

3.3 Frequently Asked Questions

Question: What type of memory does my motherboard support?

Answer: The X11DPS-RE motherboard supports up to 6TB of LRDIMM/RDIMM/NVDIMM DDR4 ECC 2933*/2666/2400/2133 MHz memory in 24 memory slots (*Note below). It also supports up to 9TB memory with DCPMM modules installed.

Note: 2933 MHz memory is supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx series) processors only. See Section 2.4 for details on installing memory.

Question: Why can't I turn off the power using the momentary power on/off switch?

Answer: The instant power off function is controlled in BIOS by the Power Button mode setting. When the On/Off feature is enabled, the motherboard will have instant off capabilities as long as the BIOS has control of the system. When the Standby or Suspend feature is enabled or when the BIOS is not in control such as during memory count (the first screen that appears when the system is turned on), the momentary on/off switch must be held for more than four seconds to shut down the system. This feature is required to implement the ACPI features on the motherboard.

Question: How do I update my BIOS?

Answer: It is recommended that you do not upgrade your BIOS if you are not experiencing any problems with your system. Updated BIOS files are located on our website at http://www.supermicro.com/ResourceApps/BIOS_IPMI_Intel.html. Please check our BIOS warning message and the information on how to update your BIOS on our website. Select your motherboard model and download the BIOS file to your computer. Also, check the current BIOS revision to make sure that it is newer than your BIOS before downloading. Please refer to the following section for the instructions on how to update your BIOS under UEFI Shell.

Note: The SPI BIOS chip used on this motherboard cannot be removed. Send your motherboard back to our RMA Department at Supermicro for repair. For BIOS Recovery instructions, please refer to the AMI BIOS Recovery Instructions posted at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/.

Question: How do I update my BIOS under UEFI Shell?

Note: We do not recommend that you update your BIOS if you are not experiencing a BIOS-related problem. If you need to update your BIOS, please follow the steps below to properly update your BIOS under UEFI Shell.

1. Download and save the BIOS update package to your computer.

2. Extract the files from the UEFI folder of the BIOS package to a USB stick.

Note: The USB stick doesn't have to be bootable; however, it has to be formatted with the FAT/FAT32 file system.

1. Insert the USB stick into a USB port, boot to the UEFI Built-In Shell, and enter the following commands to start the BIOS update:

Shell> fs0:

fs0:> cd UEFI

1. The FLASH.NSH script will compare the Flash Descriptor Table (FDT) code in the new BIOS with the existing one in the motherboard:

a. If a different FDT is found

• A new file, STARTUP.NSH, will be created, and the system will automatically reboot in 10 seconds without you pressing any key. BIOS will be updated after the system reboots.
• You can also press to force an immediate system reboot to shorten the process. During system reboot, press the key to invoke the boot menu and boot into the build-in UEFI Shell. Your BIOS will be updated automatically.

b. If the FDT is the same

- BIOS update will be immediately performed without a system reboot initiated.

Warning: Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent possible system boot failure!)

1. Perform an A/C power cycle after the message indicating the BIOS update has completed.
2. Go to the BIOS setup utility, and restore the BIOS settings.

3.4 Battery Removal and Installation

Battery Removal

To remove the onboard battery, follow the steps below:

1. Power off your system and unplug your power cable.
2. Using a tool such as a pen or a small screwdriver, push the battery lock outwards to unlock it. Once unlocked, the battery will pop out from the holder.
3. Remove the battery.

Proper Battery Disposal

Please handle used batteries carefully. Do not damage the battery in any way; a damaged battery may release hazardous materials into the environment. Do not discard a used battery in the garbage or a public landfill. Please comply with the regulations set up by your local hazardous waste management agency to dispose of your used battery properly.

Battery Installation

To install an onboard battery, follow the steps below:

1. Power off your system and unplug your power cable.

2. Locate the onboard battery as shown below

3. Identify the battery's polarity. The positive (+) side should be facing up.

4. Insert the battery into the battery holder and push it down until you hear a click to ensure that the battery is securely locked.

Note: When replacing a battery, be sure to only replace it with the same type.

LITHIUM BATTERY BATTERY HOLDER OR LITHIUM BATTERY BATTERY HOLDER

3.5 Returning Merchandise for Service

A receipt or copy of your invoice marked with the date of purchase is required before any warranty service will be rendered. You can obtain service by calling your vendor for a Returned Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. When returning to the manufacturer, the RMA number should be prominently displayed on the outside of the shipping carton and mailed prepaid or hand-carried. Shipping and handling charges will be applied for all orders that must be mailed when service is complete.

For faster service, RMA authorizations may be requested online (http://www.supermicro.com/support/rma/).

This warranty only covers normal consumer use and does not cover damages incurred in shipping or from failure due to the alteration, misuse, abuse or improper maintenance of products.

During the warranty period, contact your distributor first for any product problems.

Chapter 4

UEFI BIOS

4.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the AMIBIOS™ setup utility for the X11DPS-RE motherboard. The BIOS is stored on a chip and can be easily upgraded using a flash program.

Note: Due to periodic changes to the BIOS, some settings may have been added or deleted and might not yet be recorded in this manual. Please refer to the Manual Download area of our website for any changes to the BIOS that may not be reflected in this manual.

Starting the Setup Utility

To enter the BIOS setup utility, press the key while the system is booting-up. (In most cases, the key is used to invoke the BIOS setup screen. There are a few cases when other keys are used, such as , , etc.) Each main BIOS menu option is described in this manual.

The Main BIOS screen has two main frames. The left frame displays all the options that can be configured. "Grayed-out" options cannot be configured. The right frame displays the key legend. Above the key legend is an area reserved for a text message. When an option is selected in the left frame, it is highlighted in white. Often a text message will accompany it. (Note that BIOS has default text messages built in. We retain the option to include, omit, or change any of these text messages.) Settings printed in Bold are the default values.

A "▶" indicates a submenu. Highlighting such an item and pressing the key will open the list of settings within that submenu.

The BIOS setup utility uses a key-based navigation system called hot keys. Most of these hot keys (, , , , , , keys, etc.) can be used at any time during the setup navigation process.

4.2 Main Setup

When you first enter the AMI BIOS setup utility, you will see the Main setup screen. You can always return to the Main setup screen by selecting the Main tab on the top of the screen. The Main BIOS setup screen is shown below.

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit System Date [Fri 01/07/2000] System Time [07:05:08] Supermicro X11DPS-RE BIOS Version 3.0a Build Date 03/08/2019 CPLD Version 01.b1.15 Memory Information Total Memory 32768 MB Memory Speed 2132 MT/s Set the Date. Use Tab to switch between Date elements: ++: Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

System Date/System Time

Use this item to change the system date and time. Highlight System Date or System Time using the arrow keys. Enter new values using the keyboard. Press the key or the arrow keys to move between fields. The date must be entered in Day MM/DD/YYYY format. The time is entered in HH:MM:SS format.

Note: The time is in the 24-hour format. For example, 5:30 P.M. appears as 17:30:00. The date's default value is the BIOS build date after the RTC (Real Time Clock) reset.

Supermicro X11DPS-RE

BIOS Version

This feature displays the version of the BIOS ROM used in the system.

Build Date

This feature displays the date when the version of the BIOS ROM used in the system was built.

CPLD Version

This feature displays the version of the CPLD (Complex-Programmable Logical Device) used in the system.

Memory Information

Total Memory

This feature displays the total size of memory available in the system.

Memory Speed

This feature displays the default speed of the memory modules installed in the system.

4.3 Advanced Setup Configurations

Use the arrow keys to select the Advanced submenu and press to access the submenu items:

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss JPMI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server ME Information ▶ sSATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration ▶ Super IO Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ACPI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ TIS Auth Configuration ▶ RAM Disk Configuration Boot Feature Configuration Page ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Warning: Take Caution when changing the Advanced settings. An incorrect value, an improper DRAM frequency, or a wrong BIOS timing setting may cause the system to malfunction. When this occurs, restore the setting to the manufacturer default setting.

▶Boot Feature

Quiet Boot

Use this feature to select the screen between displaying POST messages or the OEM logo at bootup. Select Disabled to display the POST messages. Select Enabled to display the OEM logo instead of the normal POST messages. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Note: POST message is always displayed regardless of the item setting.

Option ROM Messages

Use this feature to set the display mode for the Option ROM. Select Keep Current to use the current AddOn ROM display settings. Select Force BIOS to use the Option ROM display mode set by the system BIOS. The options are Force BIOS and Keep Current.

Bootup NumLock State

Use this feature to set the Power-on state for the Numlock key. The options are Off and On.

Wait For 'F1' If Error

Select Enabled to force the system to wait until the key is pressed if an error occurs. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Interrupt 19 Capture

Interrupt 19 is the software interrupt that handles the boot disk function. When this feature is set to Immediate, the ROM BIOS of the host adaptors will "capture" Interrupt 19 at bootup immediately and allow the drives that are attached to these host adaptors to function as bootable disks. If this item is set to Postponed, the ROM BIOS of the host adaptors will not capture Interrupt 19 immediately to allow the drives attached to these adaptors to function as bootable devices at bootup. The options are Immediate and Postponed.

Re-try Boot

When EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) Boot is selected, the system BIOS will automatically reboot the system from an EFI boot device after an initial boot failure. Select Legacy Boot to allow the BIOS to automatically reboot the system from a Legacy boot device after an initial boot failure. The options are Disabled, Legacy Boot, and EFI Boot.

Power Configuration

Watch Dog Function

Select Enabled to allow the Watch Dog timer to reboot the system when it is inactive for more than 5 minutes. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Power Button Function

This feature controls how the system shuts down when the power button is pressed. Select 4 Seconds Override for the user to power off the system after pressing and holding the power button for 4 seconds or longer. Select Instant Off to instantly power off the system as soon as the user presses the power button. The options are 4 Seconds Override and Instant Off.

Restore on AC Power Loss

Use this feature to set the power state after a power outage. Select Power Off for the system power to remain off after a power loss. Select Power On for the system power to be turned on after a power loss. Select Last State to allow the system to resume its last power state before a power loss. The options are Stay Off, Power On, and Last State.

▶CPU Configuration

Warning: Setting the wrong values in the following sections may cause the system to malfunction.

▶Processor Configuration

The following CPU information will be displayed:

• Processor BSP Revision
• Processor Socket
• Processor ID
• Processor Frequency
• Processor Max Ratio
• Processor Min Ratio
• Microcode Revision
• L1 Cache RAM
• L2 Cache RAM
• L3 Cache RAM
• Processor 0 Version
• Processor 1 Version

Hyper-Threading (ALL)

Select Enable to use Intel Hyper-Threading Technology to enhance CPU performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Core Enabled

Use this feature to enable or disable CPU cores in the processor specified by the user. Use the <+> key and the <-> key on the keyboard to set the desired number of CPU cores you want to enable in a processor. Please note that the maximum of 24 CPU cores are currently available in each CPU package. The default setting is 0.

Monitor/Mwait

Select Enable to enable the Monitor/Mwait instructions in the processor. The options are Enable and Disable.

Execute Disable Bit (Available if supported by the OS & the CPU)

Select Enable for Execute Disable Bit support which will allow the processor to designate areas in the system memory where an application code can execute and where it cannot, thus preventing a worm or a virus from flooding illegal codes to overwhelm the processor, damaging the system during a virus attack. The options are Enable and Disable. (Refer to Intel and Microsoft websites for more information.)

Intel Virtualization Technology (Available when two processors are installed on the motherboard)

Select Enable to use Intel Virtualization Technology which will allow multiple workloads to share the same set of common resources. On shared virtualized hardware, various workloads (or tasks) can co-exist, sharing the same resources, while functioning in full independence from each other, and migrating freely across multi-level infrastructures and scale as needed. The settings are Enable and Disable.

PPIN Control

Select Unlock/Enable to use the Protected-Processor Inventory Number (PPIN) in the system. The options are Unlock/Enable and Unlock/Disable.

Hardware Prefetcher (Available when supported by the CPU)

If this feature is set to Enable, the hardware prefetcher will prefetch streams of data and instructions from the main memory to the Level 2 (L2) cache to improve CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

Adjacent Cache Prefetch (Available when supported by the CPU)

Select Enable for the CPU to prefetch both cache lines for 128 bytes as comprised. Select Disable for the CPU to prefetch both cache lines for 64 bytes. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: Please power off and reboot the system for the changes you've made to take effect. Please refer to Intel's website for detailed information.

DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Available when supported by the CPU)

If this feature is set to Enable, the DCU (Data Cache Unit) streamer prefetcher will prefetch data streams from the cache memory to the DCU (Data Cache Unit) to speed up data accessing and processing to enhance CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

DCU IP Prefetcher

This feature allows the system to use the sequential load history, which is based on the instruction pointer of previous loads, to determine whether the system will prefetch additional lines. The options are Enable and Disable.

LLC Prefetch

If this feature is set to Enable, LLC (hardware cache) prefetching on all threads will be supported. The options are Disable and Enable.

Extended APIC (Extended Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller)

Based on the Intel Hyper-Threading technology, each logical processor (thread) is assigned 256 APIC IDs (APIDs) in 8-bit bandwidth. When this feature is set to Enable, the APIC ID will be expanded from 8 bits to 16 bits to provide 512 APIDs to each thread to enhance CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

AES-NI

Select Enable to use the Intel Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) New Instructions (NI) to ensure data security. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶Advanced Power Management Configuration

Power Technology

Select Energy Efficient to support power-saving mode. Select Custom to customize system power settings. Select Disabled to disable power-saving settings. The options are Disable, Energy Efficient, and Custom.

Power Performance Tuning (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Select BIOS to allow the system BIOS to configure the Power-Performance Tuning Bias setting. The options are BIOS Controls EPB and OS Controls EPB.

ENERGY\_PERF\_BIAS\_CFG Mode (ENERGY PERFORMANCE BIAS CONFIGURATION Mode) (Available when "Power Performance Tuning" is set to BIOS Controls EPB)

Use this feature to set the processor power use policy to achieve the desired operation settings for your machine by prioritizing system performance or energy savings. Select Maximum Performance to maximize system performance (to its highest potential); however, this may result in maximum power consumption as energy is needed to fuel the processor frequency. The higher the performance is, the higher the power consumption will be. Select Max Power Efficient to maximize power saving; however, system performance may be substantially impacted because limited power use decreases the processor frequency. The options are Max Performance, Performance, Balanced Performance, Balanced Power, and Power.

▶CPU P State Control (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

SpeedStep (PStates)

EIST (Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology) allows the system to automatically adjust processor voltage and core frequency in an effort to reduce power consumption and heat dissipation. Please refer to Intel's website for detailed information. The options are Disable and Enable.

Config (Configure) TDP (Available when SpeedStep is set to Enable)

Use this feature to set the appropriate TDP (Thermal Design Power) level for the system. The TDP refers to the maximum amount of power allowed for running "real applications" without triggering an overheating event. The options are Normal, Level 1, and Level 2.

Activate PBF (Available when this feature supported by the processor)

Select Enable to enable Prioritized Base Frequency (PBF) feature support which will enhance CPU performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

Configure PBF (Available when Activate PBF is set to Enable)

Select Enable to allow the BIOS to configure high priority CPU cores as Prioritized Base Frequency (PBF) so that software programs do not have to configure the PBF (Prioritized Base Frequency) settings. The options are Enable and Disable.

EIST PSD Function (Available when SpeedStep is set to Enable)

Use this item to configure the processor's P-State coordination settings. During a P-State, the voltage and frequency of the processor will be reduced when it is in operation. This makes the processor more energy efficient, resulting in further energy gains. The options are HW_ALL, SW_ALL and SW-ANY.

Turbo Mode (Available when SpeedStep is set to Enable)

Select Enable for processor cores to run faster than the frequency specified by the manufacturer. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Hardware PM (Power Management) State Control Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Hardware P-States

If this feature is set to Disable, hardware will choose a P-state setting for the system based on an OS request. If this feature is set to Native Mode, hardware will choose a P-state setting based on OS guidance. If this feature is set to Native Mode with No Legacy Support, hardware will choose a P-state setting independently without OS guidance. The options are Disable, Native Mode, Out of Band Mode, and Native Mode with No Legacy Support.

▶CPU C State Control

Autonomous Core C-State

Select Enable to support Autonomous Core C-State control which will allow the processor core to control its C-State setting automatically and independently. The options are Disable and Enable.

CPU C6 Report (Available when Autonomous Core C-State is set to Disable)

Select Enable to allow the BIOS to report the CPU C6 state (ACPI C3) to the operating system. During the CPU C6 state, power to all caches is turned off. The options are Auto, Enable, and Disable.

Enhanced Halt State (C1E) (Available when Autonomous Core C-State is set to Disable)

Select Enable to enable "Enhanced Halt State" support, which will significantly reduce the CPU's power consumption by minimizing CPU's clock cycles and reduce voltage during a "Halt State." The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Package C State Control (Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Package C State

Use this feature to set the limit on the C-State package register. The options are C0/C1 state, C2 state, C6 (non-Retention) state, C6 (Retention) state, No Limit, and Auto.

▶CPU T State Control Available when "Power Technology" is set to Custom)

Software Controlled T-States

If this feature is set to Enable, CPU throttling settings will be supported by the software of the system. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶Chipset Configuration

Warning: Setting the wrong values in the following items may cause the system to malfunction.

▶North Bridge

This feature allows the user to configure the settings for the Intel North Bridge.

▶UPI (Ultra Path Interconnect) Configuration

This section displays the following UPI General Configuration information:

• Number of CPU
• Number of Active UPI Link
• Current UPI Link Speed
• Current UPI Link Frequency
• UPI Global MMIO Low Base/Limit
• UPI Global MMIO High Base/Limit
• UPI Pci-e Configuration Base/Size

Degrade Precedence

Use this feature to select the degrading precedence option for Ultra Path Interconnect (UPI) connections. Select Topology Precedent to degrade UPI features if system options are in conflict. Select Feature Precedent to degrade UPI topology if system options are in conflict. The options are Topology Precedence and Feature Precedence.

Link L0p Enable

Select Enable to enable Link L0p. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

Link L1 Enable

Select Enable to enable Link L1 (Level 1 link). The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

IO Directory Cache (IODC)

Select Enable for the IODC (I/O Directory Cache) to generate snoops instead of generating memory lockups for remote IIO (InvIToM) and/or WCiLF (Cores). Select Auto for the IODC to generate snoops (instead of memory lockups) for WCiLF (Cores). The options are Disable, Auto, Enable for Remote InvItoM Hybrid Push, InvItoM AllocFlow, Enable for Remote InvItoM Hybrid AllocNonAlloc, and Enable for Remote InvItoM and Remote WViLF.

SNC

Select Enable to use "Sub NUMA Clustering" (SNC), which supports full SNC (2-cluster) interleave and 1-way IMC interleave. Select Auto for 1-cluster or 2-cluster support depending on the status of IMC (Integrated Memory Controller) Interleaving. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

XPT Prefetch

Select Enable to support XPT Prefetching to enhance system performance. The options are Enable, Disable, and Auto.

KTI Prefetch

Select Enable to support KTI Prefetching to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Local/Remote Threshold

This feature allows the user to set the threshold for the Interrupt Request (IRQ) signal, which handles hardware interruptions. The options are Disable, Auto, Low, Medium, and High.

Stale AtoS (A to S)

The in-memory directory has three states: I, A, and S states. The I (-invalid) state indicates that the data is clean and does not exist in the cache of any other sockets. The A (-snoop All) state indicates that the data may exist in another socket in an exclusive or modified state. The S state (-Shared) indicates that the data is clean and may be shared in the caches across one or more sockets. When the system is performing "read" on the memory and if the directory line is in A state, we must snoop all other sockets because another

socket may have the line in a modified state. If this is the case, a "snoop" will return the modified data. However, it may be the case that a line "reads" in an A state, and all the snoops come back with a "miss". This can happen if another socket reads the line earlier and then has silently dropped it from its cache without modifying it. If the "Stale AtoS" feature is enabled, a line will transition to the S state when the line in the A state returns only snoop misses. That way, subsequent reads to the line will encounter it in the S state and will not have to snoop, saving the latency and snoop bandwidth. Stale "AtoS" may be beneficial in a workload where there are many cross-socket reads. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

LLC Dead Line Alloc

Select Enable to opportunistically fill the deadlines in the LLC. The options are Enable, Disable, and Auto.

Isoc Mode

Select Enable to enable Isochronous support to meet QoS (Quality of Service) requirements. This feature is especially important for Virtualization Technology. The options are Disable, Enable, and Auto.

▶Memory Configuration

Enforce POR (Plan of Record)

Select POR to enforce POR restrictions for DDR4 memory frequency and voltage programming. The options are POR and Disable.

PPR Type

Post Package Repair (PPR) is a new feature available for the DDR4 Technology. PPR provides additional spare capacity within a DDR4 DRAM module that is used to replace faulty cell areas detected during system boot. PPR offers two types of memory repairs. Soft Post Package Repair (sPPR) provides a quick, temporary fix on a raw element in a bank group of a DDR4 DRAM device, while hard Post Package Repair (hPPR) will take a longer time to provide a permanent repair on a raw element. The options are Auto, Enable, Soft PPR, and Disable.

Memory Frequency

Use this feature to set the maximum memory frequency for onboard memory modules. The options are Auto, 1866, 2000, 2133, 2400, 2666, and 2933. Note: 2933 MHz memory is supported by 2nd Gen Intel Xeon Scalable-SP (82xx/62xx series) processors only.

Data Scrambling for DDR4

Select Enable to enable data scrambling for DDR4 memory to enhance system performance and security. Select Auto for the default setting of the Memory Reference Code (MRC) to set configure data scrambling for DDR4 setting. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

tCCD\_L Relaxation

If this feature is set to Enable, SPD (Serial Presence Detect) will override tCCD_L ("Column to Column Delay-Long", or "Command to Command Delay-Long" on the column side.) If this feature is set to Disable, tCCD_L will be enforced based on the memory frequency. The options are Auto, Enable and Disable.

tRWSR (Read to Write turnaround time for Same Rank) Relaxation

Select Enable to use the same tRWSR DDR timing setting among all memory channels, and in which case, the worst case value among all channels will be used. Select Disable to use different values for the tRWSR DDR timing settings for different channels as trained. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

Enable ADR

Select Enable for ADR (Async DIMM Self-Refresh) support to enhance memory performance. The options are Disable and Enable.

Data Scrambling for NVDIMM

Select Enable to enable data scrambling support for onboard NVDIMM memory to improve system performance and security. The options are Auto, Disable, and Enable.

Erase-Arm NVDIMMs

If this feature is set to Enable, the function that arms the NVDIMMs for safe operations in the event of a power loss will be removed. The options are Enable and Disable.

Restore NVDIMMs

Select Enable to restore the functionality and the features of NVDIMMs. The options are Enable and Disable.

Interleave NVDIMMs

If this item is set to Enable, all onboard NVDIMM modules will be configured together as a group for the interleave mode. If this item is set to Disable, individual NVDIMM modules will be configured separately for the interleave mode. The options are Enable and Disable.

Reset Trigger ADR (Async DIMM Self-Refresh)

Upon system power loss, an ADR sequence will be triggered to allow ADR to flush the write-protected data buffers in the memory controller and place the DRAM memory in self-refresh mode. When this process is complete, the NVDIMM will then take control of the DRAM memory and transfer the contents to the onboard Flash memory. After the transfer is complete, the NVDIMM goes into a zero power state. The data transferred will be retained for the duration specified by the flash memory. The options are Enable and Disable.

S5 Trigger ADR

Select Enabled to support S5-Triggered ADR to enhance system performance and data integrity. The options are Disable and Enable.

2X Refresh

Select Enable for memory 2X refresh support to enhance memory performance. The options are Disable, Enable and Auto.

Page Policy

Use this feature to set the page policy for onboard memory support. The options are Closed, Adaptive, and Auto.

IMC Interleaving

Use this feature to configure interleaving settings for the IMC (Integrated Memory Controller), which will improve memory performance. The options are 1-way Interleave, 2-way Interleave, and Auto.

Average Power Budget (in mW)

This feature sets the power management policy for average power use (in an increment of 250 mW). The default setting is 15000.

▶Memory Topology

This item displays the information of onboard memory modules as detected by the BIOS.

• P1 DIMMA1/DIMMA2/DIMMB1/DIMMB2/DIMMC1/DIMMC2/DIMMD1/DIMMD2/DIMME1/DIMME2/DIMMF1/DIMMF2
• P2 DIMMA1/DIMMA2/DIMMB1/DIMMB2/DIMMC1/DIMMC2/DIMMD1/DIMMD2/DIMME1/DIMME2/DIMMF1/DIMMF2

▶Memory RAS (Reliability\_Availability\_Serviceability) Configuration

Use this submenu to configure the following Memory RAS settings.

Static Virtual Lockstep Mode

Select Enable to support Static Virtual Lockstep mode to enhance memory performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Mirror Mode

Use this feature to configure the mirror mode settings for all 1LM/2LM memory modules installed in the system which will create a duplicate copy of data stored in the memory to increase memory security, but it will reduce the memory capacity into half. The options are Disable and Enable Mirror Mode (1LM).

UEFI ARM Mirror

If this feature is set to Enable, mirror mode configuration settings for UEFI-based Address Range memory will be enabled upon system boot. This will create a duplicate copy of data stored in the memory to increase memory security, but it will reduce the memory capacity into half. The options are Disable and Enable.

Memory Rank Sparing

Select Enable to support memory-rank sparing to optimize memory performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Note: This item will not be available when memory mirror mode is set to Enable Mirror Mode 1LM or an AEP device is plugged in.

Correctable Error Threshold

Use this item to enter the threshold value for correctable memory errors. The default setting is 100.

Intel Run Sure

Select Enable to use Intel Run Sure Technology which will enhance critical data protection and increase system uptime and resiliency. The options are Enable and Disable.

ADDDC (Adaptive Double Device Data Correction) Sparing (Available when Intel Run Sure is set to Enable)

Select Enable for Adaptive Double Device Data Correction (ADDDC) support, which will not only provide memory error checking and correction but will also prevent the system from issuing a performance penalty before a device fails. Please note that virtual lockstep mode will only start to work for ADDDC after a faulty DRAM module is spared. The options are Enable and Disable.

Patrol Scrub

Patrol Scrubbing is a process that allows the CPU to correct correctable memory errors detected in a memory module and send the corrections to the requestor (the original source). When this feature is set to Enable, the IO hub will read and write back one cache line every 16K cycles if there is no delay caused by internal processing. By using this method, roughly 64 GB of memory behind the IO hub will be scrubbed every day. The options are Enable and Disable.

Patrol Scrub Interval

Use this item to specify the number of hours (between 0 to 24) required for the system to complete a full patrol scrubbing. Enter 0 for patrol scrubbing to be performed automatically. The default setting is 24.

Note: This item is hidden when Patrol Scrub item is set to Disable.

▶IIO Configuration

EV DFX (Device Function On-Hide) Features

When this feature is set to Enable, the EV_DFX Lock Bits that are located in a processor will always remain clear during electric tuning. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶CPU1 Configuration/CPU2 Configuration

IOU0 (IIO PCIe Br1)

Use this feature to configure the PCIe Bifurcation setting for a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

IOU1 (IIO PCIe Br2)

Use this feature to configure the PCIe Bifurcation setting for a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

IOU2 (IIO PCIe Br3)

Use this feature to configure the PCIe Bifurcation setting for a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are x4x4x4x4, x4x4x8, x8x4x4, x8x8, x16, and Auto.

MCP0 (IIO PCIe Br4)

Use this feature to configure the PCIe Bifurcation setting for a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are x16 and Auto.

MCP1 (IIO PCIe Br5)

Use this feature to configure the PCIe Bifurcation setting for a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are x16 and Auto.

▶Socket 0 PCI-E Br0D00F0 - Port 0/DMI (Available for CPU 1 Configuration only)

Link Speed

Use this feature to configure the link speed of a PCIe port specified by the user. The options are Auto, Gen 1 (Generation 1) (2.5 GT/s), Gen 2 (Generation 2) (5 GT/s), and Gen 3 (Generation 3) (8 GT/s)

The following information will be displayed:

• PCI-E Port Link Status
- PCI-E Port Link Max
- PCI-E Port Link Speed

PCI-E Port Max (Maximum) Payload Size (Available for CPU 1 Configuration only)

Select Auto for the system BIOS to automatically set the maximum payload value for a PCIe device specified by to user for system performance enhancement. The options are Auto, 128B, and 256B.

▶IOAT Configuration

Disable TPH (TLP Processing Hint)

TPH is used for data-tagging with a destination ID and a few important attributes. It can send critical data to a particular cache without writing through to memory. Select No in this item for TLP Processing Hint support, which will allow a "TPL request" to provide "hints" to help optimize the processing of each transaction occurred in the target memory space. The options are Yes and No.

Prioritize TPH (TLP Processing Hint)

Select Yes to prioritize the TPL requests that will allow the "hints" to be sent to help facilitate and optimize the processing of certain transactions in the system memory. The options are Enable and Disable.

Relaxed Ordering

Select Enable to allow certain transactions to be processed and completed before other transactions that have already been enqueued. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶Intel VT for Directed I/O (VT-d)

Intel® VT for Directed I/O (VT-d)

Select Enable to use Intel Virtualization Technology support for Direct I/O VT-d by reporting the I/O device assignments to the VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor) through the DMAR ACPI tables. This feature offers fully-protected I/O resource sharing across Intel platforms, providing greater reliability, security and availability in networking and data-sharing. The options are Enable and Disable.

ACS (Access Control Services) Control

Select Enable to program Access Control Services to Chipset PCIe Root Port Bridges. Select Disable to program Access Control Services to all PCIe Root Port Bridges. The options are Enable and Disable.

Interrupt Remapping

Select Enable for Interrupt Remapping support to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

PassThrough DMA

Select Enable for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to pass through DMA (Direct Memory Access) to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

ATS

Select Enable to enable ATS (Address Translation Services) support for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Posted Interrupt

Select Enable to support VT_D Posted Interrupt which will allow external interrupts to be sent directly from a direct-assigned device to a client machine in non-root mode to improve virtualization efficiency by simplifying interrupt migration and lessening the need of physical interrupts. The options are Enable and Disable.

Coherency Support (Non-Isoch)

Select Enable for the Non-Isoch VT-d engine to pass through DMA (Direct Memory Access) to enhance system performance. The options are Enable and Disable.

Intel® VMD Technology

This section describes the configuration settings for the Intel Volume Management Device (VMD) Technology.

Note: After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCIe slot of your choice, this PCIe slot will be dedicated for VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCIe device. To re-activate this slot for PCIe use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

Intel® VMD for CPU1

Intel® VMD for CPU1 PStack0

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU1 Slot1 PCI-E 3.0 x8 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

Intel® VMD for CPU1 PStack1

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack1

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU1 M.2 C-2 PCI-E 3.0 x4 VMD/CPU1 M.2 C-1 PCI-E 3.0 x4 VMD/CPU1 Slot3 PCI-E 3.0 x8 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

VMD Configuration for PStack2

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack2

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU1 Slot6 PCI-E 3.0 x8 VMD/CPU1 Slot7 PCI-E 3.0 x8 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

Intel® VMD for CPU2

Intel® VMD for CPU2 PStack0

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack0

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU2 Slot2 PCI-E 3.0 x16 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

Suppress PTT Commands (Available when PTT Support is set to Enable. This feature is for the X11DPH-Tq board only)

Select Enable to bypass TPM2 commands submitting to PTT Firmware. The options are Disable and Enable.

Intel® VMD for CPU2 PStack1

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack1

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU2 Slot5 PCI-E 3.0 x16 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

VMD Configuration for PStack2

Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device for PStack2

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the stack specified by the user. The options are Enable, and Disable.

Note: When this option is set to Enable, the following two items will display.

CPU2 Slot4 PCI-E 3.0 x16 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Disable and Enable.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

Intel® VMD for Onboard NVMe

VMD Configuration Onboard NVMe

Onboard NVMe Mode

Select Legacy Mode for the onboard NVMe devices to support Legacy Mode. The options are Legacy Mode and the VMD Mode.

Note: When this option is set to VMD Mode, the following two items will display.

P1\_NVMe0 VMD/P2\_NVMe1 VMD

Select Enable to enable Intel Volume Management Device Technology support for the root port specified by the user. The options are Enable and Disable.

Note: After you've enabled VMD support on a NMVe port, this port will be dedicated for VMD use only. To reactivate this port for NMVe use, please disable VMD support on the port.

Hot Plug Capable

Select Enable to enable Hot Plug support for the root ports specified by the user, which will allow the user to change the devices on those root ports without shutting down the system. The options are Disable and Enable.

▶IIO-PCIE Express Global Options

IIO-PCIE Express Global Options

The section allows the user to configure the following PCIe global options:

PCE-E Hot Plug

Select Enable to support Hot-plugging for the selected PCIe slots which will allow the user to replace the devices installed in the slots without shutting down the system. The options are Enable and Disabled.

PCI-E Completion Timeout (Global) Disable

Use this feature to select the PCIe Completion Time-out settings. The options are Yes, No, and Per-Port.

▶ South Bridge

The following South Bridge information will display:

• USB Module Version
• USB Devices

Legacy USB Support

Select Enabled to support onboard legacy USB devices. Select Auto to disable legacy support if there are no legacy USB devices present. Select Disable to have all USB devices available for EFI applications only. The options are Enabled, Disabled and Auto.

XHCI Hand-Off

This is a work-around solution for operating systems that do not support XHCI (Extensible Host Controller Interface) hand-off. The XHCI ownership change should be claimed by the XHCI driver. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Port 60/64 Emulation

Select Enabled for I/O port 60h/64h emulation support, which in turn, will provide complete legacy USB keyboard support for the operating systems that do not support legacy USB devices. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PCIe PLL SSC

Select Enabled for PCH PCIe Spread Spectrum Clocking support, which will allow the BIOS to monitor and attempt to reduce the level of Electromagnetic Interference caused by the components whenever needed. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Port 61h Bit-4 Emulation

Select Enabled for I/O Port 61h-Bit 4 emulation support to enhance system performance. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Install Windows 7 USB Support

Select Enabled to install the Windows 7 USB utility to support legacy USB devices for Windows 7 systems. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶Server ME (Management Engine) Configuration

This feature displays the following system ME configuration settings.

• Oper. (Operational) Firmware Version
• Backup Firmware Version
• Recovery Firmware Version
• ME Firmware Status #1ME Firmware Status #2

• Current State
• Error Code

PTT Support (Available when TPM Configuration is set to Disable.)

Select Enable to support Intel® Platform Trust Technology (PTT) to enhance system security and data integrity. Intel PTT technology integrates the Host software stack, the system BIOS, Manageability Engine (ME) features, and the PCH to run on Intel's TCG (Trusted Computing Group) in conjunction with the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) firmware installed in your system to ensure data security and integrity. The options are Disable and Enable.

Suppress PTT Commands (Available when PTT Support is set to Enable.)

Select Enable to bypass TPM2 commands and submit the system to the PTT (Platform Trust Technology) Firmware.

▶(PCH) SATA Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the AMI BIOS automatically detects the presence of the SATA devices that are supported by the Intel PCH chip and displays the following items:

SATA Controller

This item enables or disables the onboard SATA controller supported by the Intel PCH chip. The options are Enable and Disable.

Configure SATA as (Available when SATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select AHCI to configure a SATA drive specified by the user as an AHCI drive. Select RAID to configure a SATA drive specified by the user as a RAID drive. The options are AHCI and RAID. (Note: This item is hidden when the SATA Controller item is set to Disabled.)

SATA HDD Unlock (Available when SATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select Enable to unlock SATA HDD password in the OS. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA/sSATA RAID Boot Select (Available when Configure SATA as is set to RAID)

This feature allows the user to decide which controller should be used to boot the system. The options are None, SATA Controller, sSATA Controller, and Both.

Aggressive Link Power Management

When this feature is set to Enable, the SATA AHCI controller manages the power use of the SATA link. The controller will put the link in a low power mode during an extended period of I/O inactivity, and will return the link to an active state when I/O activity resumes. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA RAID Option ROM/UEFI Driver (Available when Configure SATA as is set to RAID)

Select EFI to load the EFI driver for system boot. Select Legacy to load a legacy driver for system boot. The options are Disable, EFI, and Legacy.

SATA Port 0 - SATA Port 7

Hot Plug

Select Enable to support Hot-plugging for the device installed on a selected SATA port which will allow the user to replace the device installed in the slot without shutting down the system. The options are Enable and Disable.

Spin Up Device

When this feature is set to Enable, the SATA device installed on the SATA port specified by the user will start a COMRESET initialization when an edge is detected from 0 to 1. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA Device Type

Use this feature to specify if the device installed on the SATA port specified by the user should be connected to a Solid State drive or a Hard Disk Drive. The options are Hard Disk Drive and Solid State Drive.

▶ sSATA Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the AMI BIOS automatically detects the presence of the sSATA devices that are supported by the sSATA controller and displays the following items:

sSATA Controller

This item enables or disables the onboard sSATA controller supported by the Intel PCH. The options are Enable and Disable.

Configure sSATA as (Available when sSATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select AHCI to configure an sSATA drive specified by the user as an AHCI drive. Select RAID to configure an sSATA drive specified by the user as a RAID drive. The options are AHCI and RAID. (Note: This feature is hidden when the sSATA Controller item is set to Disabled.)

SATA HDD Unlock (Available when sSATA Controller is set to Enable)

Select Enable to unlock sSATA HDD password in the OS. The options are Enable and Disable.

SATA/sSATA RAID Boot Select (Available when Configure sSATA as is set to RAID)

This feature allows the user to decide which controller should be used to boot the system. The options are None, SATA Controller, sSATA Controller, and Both.

Aggressive Link Power Management

When this feature is set to Enable, the sSATA AHCI controller manages the power use of the sSATA link. The controller will put the link in a low power mode during an extended period of I/O inactivity, and will return the link to an active state when I/O activity resumes. The options are Disable and Enable.

sSATA RAID Option ROM/UEFI Driver (Available when Configure sSATA as is set to RAID)

Select EFI to load the EFI driver for system boot. Select Legacy to load a legacy driver for system boot. The options are Disable, EFI, and Legacy.

sSATA Port 0 - sSATA Port 5

Hot Plug

Select Enable to support Hot-plugging for the device installed on an sSATA port specified by the user which will allow the user to replace the device installed in the slot without shutting down the system. The options are Enable and Disabled.

Spin Up Device

This setting allows the SATA device installed on the SATA port specified by the user to start a COMRESET initialization when an edge is detected from 0 to 1. The options are Enable and Disable.

sSATA Device Type

Use this feature to specify if the device installed on the sSATA port specified by the user should be connected to a Solid State drive or a Hard Disk Drive. The options are Hard Disk Drive and Solid State Drive.

▶PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration

The following PCI information will be displayed:

• PCI Bus Driver Version
• PCI Devices Common Settings

Above 4G Decoding (Available if the system supports 64-bit PCI decoding)

Select Enabled to decode a PCI device that supports 64-bit in the space above 4G Address. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

SR-IOV Support (Available if the system supports Single-Root Virtualization)

Select Enabled for Single-Root IO Virtualization support. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

MMIOHBase

Use this feature to select the base memory size according to memory-address mapping for the IO hub. The options are 56T, 40T, 24T, 16T, 4T, and 1T.

MMIO High Granularity Size

Use this feature to select the high memory size according to memory-address mapping for the IO hub. The options are 1G, 4G, 16G, 64G, 256G, and 1024G.

Maximum Read Request

Select Auto for the system BIOS to automatically set the maximum size for a read request for a PCIe device to enhance system performance. The options are Auto, 128 Bytes, 256 Bytes, 512 Bytes, 1024 Bytes, 2048 Bytes, and 4096 Bytes.

MMCFG Base

This feature determines how the lowest MMCFG (Memory-Mapped Configuration) base is assigned to onboard PCI devices. The options are 1G, 1.5G, 1.75G. 2G, 2.25G, and 3G.

VGA Priority

Use this feature to select the graphics device to be used as the primary video display for system boot. The options are Auto, Onboard and Offboard.

Disable Unused PLX

Select Enabled to turn off PCIe support when there are no downstream PCIe devices attached to this device. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PLX Workaround For NVIDIA GPU

Select Enabled to shut down PLX BAR0 and BAR1 support when a NVIDIA GPU is populated in the slots. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PCI Devices Option ROM Settings

Onboard NVME1/NVME2 OPROM

Select EFI to allow the user to boot the computer using an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) device installed on the NVME connector specified by the user. Select Legacy to allow the user to boot the computer using a legacy device installed on the NVME connector specified by the user. The options are Disabled, Legacy and EFI.

CPU1 Slot1 PCI-E x16 RSC-R1U-E16R OPROM/ CPU2 Slot2 PCI-E x16 RSC-R1U-E16R OPROM

Select EFI to allow the user to boot the computer using an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) device installed on the PCIe slot specified by the user. Select Legacy to allow the user to boot the computer using a legacy device installed on the PCIe slot specified by the user. The options are Disabled, Legacy and EFI. (Note: Riser card names may differ in each system.)

Onboard Video OPROM (Option ROM)

Use this feature to select the Onboard Video Option ROM type. The options are Do Not Launch, Legacy and UEFI.

Onboard LAN1 ROM

Use this feature to select the type of device installed in LAN Port1, which will be used for system boot. The options are Legacy, EFI and Disabled.

Onboard LAN 2 ROM

Use this feature to select the type of device installed in LAN Port2, which will be used for system boot. The options are Legacy, EFI and Disabled.

▶ Network Stack Configuration

Network Stack

Select Enabled to enable PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) or UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) for network stack support. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If "Network Stack" is set to Enabled, the following items will display:

Ipv4 PXE Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv4 PXE boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv4 PXE boot option. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ipv4 HTTP Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv4 HTTP boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv4 HTTP boot option. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Ipv6 PXE Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv6 PXE boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv6 PXE boot option. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Ipv6 HTTP Support

Select Enabled to enable lpv6 HTTP boot support. If this feature is disabled, it will not create the lpv6 HTTP boot option. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

IPSEC Certificate

Select Enable to enable the IPSEC certificate for Ikev support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

PXE Boot Wait Time

Use this feature to select the wait time to press the key to abort the PXE boot. The default is 0.

Media Detect Time

Use this feature to select the wait time in seconds for the BIOS ROM to detect the LAN media (Internet connection or LAN port). The default is 1.

▶ Super IO Configuration

Super IO Chip AST2500

▶ Serial Port 1 Configuration

Serial Port

Select Enabled to enable Serial Port 1. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Device Settings (Available when the item above "Serial Port (1)" is set to Enabled)

This item displays the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of a serial port specified by the user.

Change Settings

This feature specifies the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of Serial Port 1. Select Auto for the BIOS to automatically assign the base I/O and IRQ address to a serial port specified.

The options for Serial Port 1 are Auto, (IO=3F8h; IRQ=4), (IO=3F8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12), (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12); (IO=3E8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12), and (IO=2E8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12).

▶ Serial Port 2 Configuration

Serial Port

Select Enabled to enable Serial Port 2. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Device Settings (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3) (Available when the item above "Serial Port (2)" is set to Enabled)

This feature displays the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of a serial port specified by the user.

Change Settings

This feature specifies the base I/O port address and the Interrupt Request address of Serial Port 2. Select Auto for the BIOS to automatically assign the base I/O and IRQ address to a serial port specified.

The options for Serial Port 2 are Auto, (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3), (IO=3F8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12), (IO=2F8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12); (IO=3E8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12), and (IO=2E8h; IRQ=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12).

Serial Port 2 Attribute

Select SOL to use COM Port 2 as a Serial_Over_LAN (SOL) port for console redirection. The options are COM and SOL.

▶Serial Port Console Redirection

COM 1 Console Redirection

Select Enabled to enable COM Port 1 for Console Redirection, which will allow a client machine to be connected to a host machine at a remote site for networking. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above is set to Enabled, the following items will become available for configuration:

COM 1

▶ Console Redirection Settings (for COM 1)

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII Character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the Extended ASCII Character Set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per second

Use this feature to set the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in the host computer and the client computer. A lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (bits per second).

Data Bits

Use this feature to set the data transmission size for Console Redirection. The options are 7 (Bits) and 8 (Bits).

Parity

A parity bit can be sent along with regular data bits to detect data transmission errors. Select Even if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is even. Select Odd if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is odd. Select None if you do not want to send a parity bit with your data bits in transmission. Select Mark to add a mark as a parity bit to be sent along with the data bits. Select Space to add a Space as a parity bit to be sent with your data bits. The options are None, Even, Odd, Mark and Space.

Stop Bits

A stop bit indicates the end of a serial data packet. Select 1 Stop Bit for standard serial data communication. Select 2 Stop Bits if slower devices are used. The options are 1 and 2.

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop sending data when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start sending data when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None and Hardware RTS/CTS.

VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support

Select Enabled to enable VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Recorder Mode

Select Enabled to capture the data displayed on a terminal and send it as text messages to a remote server. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Resolution 100x31

Select Enabled for extended-terminal resolution support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Putty KeyPad

This feature selects Function Keys and KeyPad settings for Putty, which is a terminal emulator designed for the Windows OS. The options are VT100, LINUX, XTERMR6, SCO, ESCN, and VT400.

COM2/SOL (Serial-Over-LAN)

Console Redirection (for COM2/SOL)

Select Enabled to use the SOL port for Console Redirection. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above is set to Enabled, the following items will become available for user's configuration:

▶ Console Redirection Settings (for COM2/SOL)

Use this feature to specify how the host computer will exchange data with the client computer, which is the remote computer used by the user.

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII Character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the Extended ASCII Character Set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per second

Use this feature to set the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in the host computer and the client computer. A lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (bits per second).

Data Bits

Use this feature to set the data transmission size for Console Redirection. The options are 7 (Bits) and 8 (Bits).

Parity

A parity bit can be sent along with regular data bits to detect data transmission errors. Select Even if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is even. Select Odd if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is odd. Select None if you do not want to send a parity bit with your data bits in transmission. Select Mark to add a mark as a parity bit to be sent along with the data bits. Select Space to add a Space as a parity bit to be sent with your data bits. The options are None, Even, Odd, Mark and Space.

Stop Bits

A stop bit indicates the end of a serial data packet. Select 1 Stop Bit for standard serial data communication. Select 2 Stop Bits if slower devices are used. The options are 1 and 2.

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop sending data when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start data-sending when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None and Hardware RTS/CTS.

VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support

Select Enabled to enable VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Recorder Mode

Select Enabled to capture the data displayed on a terminal and send it as text messages to a remote server. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Resolution 100x31

Select Enabled for extended-terminal resolution support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Putty KeyPad

This feature selects Function Keys and KeyPad settings for Putty, which is a terminal emulator designed for the Windows OS. The options are VT100, LINUX, XTERMR6, SCO, ESCN, and VT400.

▶Legacy Console Redirection Settings

▶ Console Redirection Settings (for COM2/SOL)

Use this feature to specify how the host computer will exchange data with the client computer, which is the remote computer used by the user.

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII Character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the Extended ASCII Character Set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per second

Use this feature to set the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in the host computer and the client computer. A lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 (bits per second).

Data Bits

Use this feature to set the data transmission size for Console Redirection. The options are 7 (Bits) and 8 (Bits).

Parity

A parity bit can be sent along with regular data bits to detect data transmission errors. Select Even if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is even. Select Odd if the parity bit is set to 0, and the number of 1's in data bits is odd. Select None if you do not want to send a parity bit with your data bits in transmission. Select Mark to add a mark as a parity bit to be sent along with the data bits. Select Space to add a Space as a parity bit to be sent with your data bits. The options are None, Even, Odd, Mark and Space.

Stop Bits

A stop bit indicates the end of a serial data packet. Select 1 Stop Bit for standard serial data communication. Select 2 Stop Bits if slower devices are used. The options are 1 and 2.

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop sending data when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start data-sending when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None and Hardware RTS/CTS.

VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support

Select Enabled to enable VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Recorder Mode

Select Enabled to capture the data displayed on a terminal and send it as text messages to a remote server. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Resolution 100x31

Select Enabled for extended-terminal resolution support. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Putty KeyPad

This feature selects Function Keys and KeyPad settings for Putty, which is a terminal emulator designed for the Windows OS. The options are VT100, LINUX, XTERMR6, SCO, ESCN, and VT400.

Legacy Console Redirection Settings

Use this feature to select the COM port to display redirection of Legacy OS and Legacy OPROM messages. The options are COM1 and COM2/SOL.

Legacy OS Redirection Resolution

Use this feature to select the number of rows and columns used in Console Redirection for Legacy OS support. The options are 80x24 and 80x25.

Redirection After BIOS Post

Use this feature to enable or disable Legacy Console Redirection after BIOS POST. When the option-Bootloader is selected, Legacy Console Redirection is disabled before booting the OS. When the option-Always Enable is selected, Legacy Console Redirection remains enabled upon OS bootup. The options are Always Enable and Bootloader.

Serial Port for Out-of-Band Management/Windows Emergency Management Services (EMS)

The feature allows the user to configure Console Redirection settings to support Out-of-Band Serial Port management.

Console Redirection (for EMS)

Select Enabled to use a COM port specified by the user for EMS Console Redirection. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

*If the item above is set to Enabled, the following items will become available for user's configuration:

▶Console Redirection Settings (for EMS)

Out-of-Band Management Port

This feature selects a serial port in a client server to be used by the Windows Emergency Management Services (EMS) to communicate with a remote host server. The options are COM1 (Console Redirection) and COM2/SOL (Console Redirection).

Terminal Type

Use this feature to select the target terminal emulation type for Console Redirection. Select VT100 to use the ASCII character set. Select VT100+ to add color and function key support. Select ANSI to use the extended ASCII character set. Select VT-UTF8 to use UTF8 encoding to map Unicode characters into one or more bytes. The options are ANSI, VT100, VT100+, and VT-UTF8.

Bits Per Second

This feature sets the transmission speed for a serial port used in Console Redirection. Make sure that the same speed is used in both host computer and the client computer. A lower transmission speed may be required for long and busy lines. The options are 9600, 19200, 57600, and 115200 (bits per second).

Flow Control

Use this feature to set the flow control for Console Redirection to prevent data loss caused by buffer overflow. Send a "Stop" signal to stop data-sending when the receiving buffer is full. Send a "Start" signal to start data-sending when the receiving buffer is empty. The options are None, Hardware RTS/CTS, and Software Xon/Xoff.

The setting for each these features is displayed:

Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits

▶ACPI Settings

Use this feature to configure Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) power management settings for your system.

NUMA Support (Available when the OS supports this feature)

Select Enabled to enable Non-Uniform Memory Access support to enhance system performance. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

WHEA Support

Select Enabled to support the Windows Hardware Error Architecture (WHEA) platform and provide a common infrastructure for the system to handle hardware errors within the Windows OS environment to reduce system crashes and to enhance system recovery and health monitoring. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶Trusted Computing (Available when a TPM device is installed and detected by the BIOS)

When a TPM (Trusted-Platform Module) device is detected in your machine, the following information will be displayed.

Trusted Computing TPM20 Device Found Firmware Version: 7.63 Vendor: IFM Security Device Support [Enable] Active PCR banks SHA-1,SHA256 Available PCR banks SHA-1,SHA256 SHA-1 PCR Bank [Enabled] SHA256 PCR Bank [Enabled] Pending operation [None] Platform Hierarchy [Enabled] Storage Hierarchy [Enabled] Endorsement Hierarchy [Enabled] PH Randomization [Disabled] TXT Support [Disabled] Enables or Disables BIOS support for security device. 0.S. will not show Security Device. TCG EFI protocol and INTIA Interface will not be available. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. FL: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

• TPM2.0 Device Found
• Firmware Version
• Vendor

Security Device Support

If this feature and the TPM jumper (JPT1) on the motherboard are both enabled, the onboard security (TPM) device will be enabled in the BIOS to enhance data integrity and system security. Please note that the OS will not show the security device. Neither TCG EFI protocol nor INT1A interaction will be made available for use. If you have made changes on the setting on this item, be sure to reboot the system for the change to take effect. The options are Disable and Enable. If this option is set to Enable, the following screen and items will display:

• Active PCR Banks
• Available PCR Banks

SHA-1 PCR Bank

Select Enabled to enable SHA-1 PCR Bank support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

SHA256 PCR Bank

Select Enabled to enable SHA256 PCR Bank support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Pending Operation

Use this feature to schedule a TPM-related operation to be performed by a security (TPM) device at the next system boot to enhance system data integrity. Your system will reboot to carry out a pending TPM operation. The options are None and TPM Clear.

Note: Your system will reboot to carry out a pending TPM operation.

Platform Hierarchy (for TPM Version 2.0 and above)

Select Enabled for TPM Platform Hierarchy support which will allow the manufacturer to utilize the cryptographic algorithm to define a constant key or a fixed set of keys to be used for initial system boot. These early boot codes are shipped with the platform and are included in the list of "public keys". During system boot, the platform firmware uses the trusted public keys to verify a digital signature in an attempt to manage and control the security of the platform firmware used in a host system via a TPM device. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Storage Hierarchy

Select Enabled for TPM Storage Hierarchy support that is intended to be used for non-privacy-sensitive operations by the platform owner such as an IT professional or the end user. Storage Hierarchy has an owner policy and an authorization value, both of which can be set and are held constant (-rarely changed) through reboots. This hierarchy can be cleared or changed independently of the other hierarchies. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Endorsement Hierarchy

Select Enabled for Endorsement Hierarchy support, which contains separate controls to address the user's privacy concerns because the primary keys in this hierarchy are certified

by the TPM or a manufacturer to be constrained to an authentic TPM device that is attached to an authentic platform. A primary key can be an encrypted, and a certificate can be created using TPM2_ActivateCredential. It allows the user to independently enable "flag, policy, and authorization value" without involving other hierarchies. A user with privacy concerns can disable the endorsement hierarchy while still using the storage hierarchy for TPM applications and permitting the platform software to use the TPM. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

PH (Platform Hierarchy) Randomization (for TPM Version 2.0 and above)

Select Enabled for Platform Hierarchy Randomization support, which is used only during the platform developmental stage. This feature cannot be enabled in the production platforms. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

TXT Support

Select Enabled to enable Intel Trusted Execution Technology (TXT) support to enhance system security and data integrity. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Note 1: If the option for this item (TXT Support) is set to Enabled, be sure to disable EV DFX (Device Function On-Hide) support for the system to work properly. (EV DFX is under "IIO Configuration" in the "Chipset/North Bridge" submenu).

Note 2: For more information on TPM, please refer to the TPM manual at http://www.supermicro.com/manuals/other.

▶TLS Authenticate Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the following items will be displayed:

▶Server CA Configuration

This feature allows the user to configure the client certificate that is to be used by the server.

▶Enroll Certification

This feature allows the user to enroll the certificate in the system.

▶Enroll Cert (Certification) Using File

This feature allows the user to enroll the security certificate in the system by using a file.

Cert (Certification) GUID (Global Unique Identifier)

This feature displays the GUID for this system.

▶Commit Changes and Exit

Select this feature to keep the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Discard Changes and Exit

Select this feature to discard the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Delete Certification

If this feature is set to Enable, the certificate enrolled in the system will be deleted. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶Client Certification Configuration

This feature allows the user to configure the client certificate to be used by the server.

▶Enroll Certification

This feature allows the user to enroll the certificate in the system.

▶Enroll Cert (Certification) Using File

This feature allows the user to enroll the security certificate in the system by using a file.

Cert (Certification) GUID (Global Unique Identifier)

This feature displays the GUID for this system.

▶Commit Changes and Exit

Select this feature to keep the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Discard Changes and Exit

Select this feature to discard the changes you have made and exit from the system.

▶Delete Certification

If this feature is set to Enable, the certificate enrolled in the system will be deleted. The options are Enable and Disable.

▶RAM Disk Configuration

This feature allows the user to configure the settings for the RAM disks installed in the system. When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

- Disk Memory Type: This feature specifies the type of memory that is available for you to create a RAM disk. The options are Boot Service Data and Reserved.

▶ Create Raw

This feature allows the user to create a raw RAM disk from all available memory modules in the system. When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Size (Hex): Use this feature to set the size of the raw RAM disk. The default setting is 1.
• Create & Exit: Select this feature when you want to exit from this submenu after you've created a raw RAM disk.
• Discard & Exit: Select this feature when you want to abandon the changes you've made and to exit from the submenu.

▶ Create from File

This feature allows the user to create a RAM disk from a file specified by the user. Select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Create RAM Disk List: Use this feature to create a RAM disk list.

- Remove Selected RAM Disk(s): Use this feature to delete the RAM disk(s) specified by the user.

Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration

When you select this submenu and press , the following screen will display:

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Intel(R) Octane(TM) 20 Persistent Memory Configuration Version: 1.0.0.3333 Select an action below. Detected DIMMs: All DIMMs are healthy. ► DIMMs ► Regions ► Namespaces ► Total capacity ► Diagnostics ► Preferences Detected DIMMs: +: Select Screen T↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

• Version: This feature displays the version of DCPMM used in the system.
• Select an action below
• Detected DIMMs: This feature displays the number of DCPMM memory modules detected by the BOS.
• All DIMMs are healthy (The health status of the DCPMM is displayed.)

▶DIMMs

This submenu allows the user to view and configure the settings of the DCPMM memory modules installed in the system. Select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

• Select a specific DIMM that you want to view.
  • DIMMs on Socket 0x0000:
  • DIMMs on Socket 0x0001:

▶DIMM ID

This submenu allows the user to view and to perform an action on a DCPMM module specified by the user. When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

• DIMM UID: This feature displays the unique ID of the DCPMM module.
• DIMM Handle: This feature displays the unique handle that the CPU assigns to the DCPMM module.
• DIMM Physical ID: This feature displays the physical ID of the DCPMM module.
• Manageability State: This feature indicates the manageability state of the DCPMM module.
  • Health State: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.

- Health State Reason: This feature indicates the reason that effectuates the health state of the DCPMM module.

- Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module.

- Firmware Version: This feature indicates the firmware version of the DCPMM module.

- Firmware API Version: This feature indicates the firmware API version of the DCPMM module.

• Lock State: This feature indicates the lock state of the DCPMM module.
• Staged Firmware Version: This feature indicates the staged firmware version of the DCPMM module.
• Firmware Update Status: This feature indicates the firmware update status of the DCPMM module.
• Manufacturer: This feature indicates the manufacturer of the DCPMM module.

Show More Details

Select Enabled to view more detailed information on the DCPMM module. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

*If this option is set to Enabled, the following items will display:

• Serial Number
• Part Number
• Socket
  • Memory Controller ID
• Vendor ID
• Device ID
• System Vendor ID
• Subsystem Vendor ID
• Subsystem Device ID
• Device Locator
• Subsystem Revision ID
  • Interface Format Code
  • Manufacturing Date
  • Manufacturing Location
• Memory Type
  • Memory Bank Label
  • Data Width Label [b]

• Manufacturing Information Valid

• Total Width [b]
• Speed [MHz]
• Channel ID
• Channel Position
• Revision ID
• Form Factor
• Manufacturer ID
  • Controller Revision ID
• IS New
• Memory Capacity
• APP Direct Capacity
  • Unconfigured Capacity
• Inaccessible Capacity
• Reserved Capacity
  • Peak Power Budget [mW]
  • Avg (Average) Power Budget [mW]
  • Max Average Power Budget [mW]
  • Package Sparing Capable
  • Package Sparing Enabled
  • Package Spares Available
• Configuration Status
• SKU Violation
• ARS Status
  • Overwrite DIMM Status

• Last Shutdown Time

• First Fast Refresh

• Viral Policy Enable
• Viral State
• Latched Last Shutdown Status
• Unlatched Last Shutdown Status
  • Security Capabilities
• Modes Supported
• Boot Status
• AIT DRAM Enabled
• Error Injection Enabled
  • Media Temperature Injection Enabled
• Software Triggers Enabled
• Software Triggers Enabled Details
  • Poison Error Injections Counter
• Poison Error Clear Counter
  • Media Temperature Injections Counter
• Software Triggers Counter
  • Master Passphrase Enabled

▶Monitor Health

Select this submenu to view the health status and thresholds of the DCPMM module specified by the user.

- Sensor Type: This feature displays the type of health items that are being monitored.

- Value: This feature displays the value of the monitor sensor mentioned above.

- Non-critical Thresholds: This feature displays the normal threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.

• Critical Lower Threshold: This feature displays the lowest threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.
• Critical Upper Threshold: This feature displays the higher threshold value for the DCPMM module to maintain normal operations.
• Fatal Threshold: This feature indicates the highest value allowed for the DCPMM module to remain functional. Beyond this value, the DCPMM selected will become non-operational.
  • State: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.
• Alarm Enabled State: This feature indicates the status of the non-critical threshold alarm for the DCPMM module specified by the user.
• Modify Non-critical Thresholds: Use this feature to modify non-critical thresholds.
• Controller Temperature: This feature displays the controller temperature in Celsius.
  • Media Temperature: This feature displays the media temperature in Celsius.
  • Percentage Remaining

▶Apply Changes

Use this feature to apply changes that you've made on the DCPMM modules to the system.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Update Firmware

Use this feature to select the firmware image to be loaded on the DCPMM module. Once it is loaded to the system, please reboot the system and select update for the firmware to take effect. The following items will display:

• Current Firmware Version: This feature displays the current firmware version.
• Selected Firmware Version: This feature allows the user to select a new firmware version to use.
• File: This feature allows the user to specify the file path in the root directory that contains the new firmware for firmware update.
• Staged Firmware Version: This feature indicates the staged firmware version of the DCPMM module specified by the user.

▶Update

Select this feature to update the firmware settings.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Configure Security

Use this feature to configure the security settings for all onboard DCPMM modules.

State

Select Enabled to configure the security settings for the DCPMM modules installed in the system. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

• Enable Security: Use this feature to enable security settings for the onboard DCPMM modules.
• Secure Erase: Use this feature to erase all the persistent data saved in the DCPMM modules.
• Freeze Lock: Use this feature to enable the security lock for the onboard DCPMM modules.

▶Back to Main Menu

- Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Configure Data Policy

Use this feature to configure the data policy settings for all onboard DCPMM modules.

First Fast Fresh State

Select Enabled to display the First Fast Fresh state for onboard DCPMM modules.

▶Enable First Fast Fresh State

Select Enabled to support the first fast fresh state of DCPMM data policy.

▶Disable First Fast Fresh State

Select Disable to disable the first fast fresh state of DCPMM data policy.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Regions

Current Configuration

▶Region ID

When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

- Region ID: This feature displays the Region ID of the DCPMM module.

- DIMM ID: This feature displays the DIMM ID of the DCPMM module.

- ISet ID: This feature displays the ISet ID of the DCPMM module.

- Persistent Memory Type: This feature indicates the persistent memory type of the DCPMM module.

- Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module.

- Free Capacity: This feature indicates the capacity of the DCPMM module that is available for use.

• Health: This feature indicates the health state of the DCPMM module.

- Socket ID: This feature displays the Socket ID of the DCPMM module.

Persistent Memory Type

Capacity

Free Capacity

▶Create Goal Configuration

When this submenu is selected, the following items will display:

- Create Goal Configuration for: Use this feature to select the target to create goal configuration for the DCPMM modules. The options are Platform and Socket.

- Reserved [%]: Use this feature to reserve a percentage of the DCPMM capacity for a particular purpose and keep this portion of memory space from being mapped into the physical address of system for system use.

- Memory Mode [%]: Use this feature to reserve a percentage of the DCPMM capacity for special use in a specific Memory Mode. Please note that this value can be automatically set by the system.

Persistent Memory Type

This feature allows the user to specify the type of DCPMM memory capacity to be created. The options are App Direct and App Direct Not Interleave.

Namespace Label Version

Use this feature to view and modify the namespace label version to initialize when creating goals. The options are 1.2 and 1.1.

▶Back to Regions Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Regions submenu.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Namespaces

This subsection allows the user to select a namespace to view the following information on the selected namespace

Namespace ID/Name/Heath Status

▶0x00000201

Select this feature and press , the following items will display:

• UUID
  • ID
• Name
• Region
• Health
• Mode
• Block Size
• Units: Use this feature to change the namespace capacity (in the unit of B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.)
• Capacity
• Label Version

▶Save: After configuring the settings for the namespace above, click on to save changes.

▶Delete After configuring the settings for the namespace above, click on to delete the changes you've made on the namespace. Please note that all data contained in the namespace will be deleted as well when you press .
▶Back to Namespaces
▶Back to Main Menu

▶Create Namespace

Use this submenu to create a namespace. The following information will display:

Name

Region ID

This feature displays the region ID of the DCPMM module. The options are 0x0001 and 0x0002.

Mode

Use this item to set the Namespace mode. The options are None and Sector.

Capacity Input

Select Remaining to use the maximum memory capacity currently available as system memory capacity. Select Manual to enter the system memory capacity manually. The options are Remaining and Manual.

Units

Use this feature to select the type of unit to use when inputting namespace capacity in the system.

The options are B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.

- Capacity: This feature displays the namespace capacity.

▶Back to Namespace

Select this feature and press to go back to the Namespaces submenu.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Total Capacity

This feature allows the user to set the total DCPMM resource capacity allocated across all segments in the host server.

• Raw Capacity: This feature specifies the raw capacity of the DCPMM module.
• App. Direct Capacity: This feature specifies the App. direct capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Memory Capacity: This feature specifies the memory capacity of the DCPMM module.
• Unconfigured Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM module that has not been configured.
• Inaccessible Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM memory that is not accessible to the user.
• Reserved Capacity: This feature specifies the capacity of the DCPMM memory that is reserved for a particular use.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶ Diagnostics

Perform Diagnostic Tests on DIMMs

When you select this submenu and press , the following items will display:

Choose Diagnostics Type:

Quick Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the quick diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module installed in the system when needed. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

DIMM ID

Select Enabled for the quick diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled. (Note: More DIMM IDs will appear If more DCPMM modules are installed on the motherboard.)

Config (Configure) Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the platform configuration diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

FW (Firmware) Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the firmware diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Security Diagnostics

Select Enabled for the security diagnostics test to be performed on the DCPMM module. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

▶ Execute Tests

Select this feature and press to execute the selected diagnostic tests.

▶Back to Main Menu

Select this feature and press to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

▶Preferences

View and/or modify user preferences

Default DIMM ID

This feature allows the user to view and to modify the default DIMM ID as displayed on the screen. The options are Handle and UID.

Capacity Units

This feature allows the user to view and to set the default capacity unit of the selected DCPMM to be displayed on the screen. The options are Auto, Auto_10, B, MB, MiB, GB, GiB, TB, and TiB.

App Direct Settings

This feature displays the Application Direct Settings. The default setting is 4KB_4KB (Recommended).

App Direct Granularity

This feature allows the user to view and modify the minimum App Direct Granularity for each DIMM installed on the motherboard. The default setting is Recommended and 1.

▶Back to Main Menu

Use this feature to go back to the Intel® Optane® DC Persistent Memory Configuration menu.

4.4 Event Logs

Use this feature to configure Event Log settings.

Note: After you've made a change on a setting below, please be sure to reboot the system for the change to take effect.

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit ▶ Change Subios Event Log Settings ▶ View Subios Event Log Press to change the Subios Event Log configuration. ++: Select Screen F↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Change SMBIOS Event Log Settings

Enabling/Disabling Options

SMBIOS Event Log

Select Enabled to enable SMBIOS (System Management BIOS) Event Logging during system boot. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Erasing Settings

Erase Event Log

Select "No" to keep the event log without erasing it upon next system bootup. Select "Yes, Next Reset" to erase the event log upon next system reboot. The options are "No", "Yes, Next Reset", and "Yes, Every Reset".

When Log is Full

Select Erase Immediately to immediately erase all errors in the SMBIOS event log when the event log is full. Select Do Nothing for the system to do nothing when the SMBIOS event log is full. The options are Do Nothing and Erase Immediately.

SMBIOS Event Log Standard Settings

Log System Boot Event

Select Enabled to log system boot events. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

MECI (Multiple Event Count Increment)

Enter the increment value for the multiple event counter. Enter a number between 1 to 255. The default setting is 1.

METW (Multiple Event Count Time Window)

This feature is used to determine how long (in minutes) should the multiple event counter wait before generating a new event log. Enter a number between 0 to 99. The default setting is 60.

▶View System Event Log

This feature allows the user to view the event in the system event log. Select this item and press to view the status of an event in the log. The following categories are displayed: Date/Time/Error Code/Severity

4.5 IPMI

Use this feature to configure Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) settings.

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (CI 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit IPMI Firmware Revision 1.56 Status Of EMC Working SMC Configured Power Control Policy Power off Power Control Policy [Unspecified] ► System Event Log ► EMC Network Configuration Configure EMC network parameters +: Select Screen T↓: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

When you select this submenu and press the key, the following information will display:

• IPMI Firmware Revision: This feature indicates the IPMI firmware revision used in your system.
• Status of BMC: This feature indicates the status of the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) installed in your system.
• BMC Configured Power: This feature allows to set power control for BMC configuration.
• Control Policy: This feature allows to set power control. Default setting is Power off.
• Power Control Policy: This feature provides support for power control policy. The options are Do not Powerup, Last Power State, Power Restore and Unspecified.

▶System Event Log

Enabling/Disabling Options

SEL Components

Select Enabled to enable all system event logging upon system boot. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Erasing Settings

Erase SEL

Select "Yes, On next reset" to erase all system event logs upon next system boot. Select "Yes, On every reset" to erase all system event logs upon each system reboot. Select "No" to keep all system event logs after each system reboot. The options are "No", "Yes, On next reset", and "Yes, On every reset".

When SEL is Full

This feature allows the user to determine what the BIOS should do when the system event log is full. Select Erase Immediately to erase all events in the log when the system event log is full. The options are Do Nothing and Erase Immediately.

Note: After you've made a change on a setting below, please be sure to reboot the system for the change to take effect.

▶BMC Network Configuration

The following items will be displayed:

• IPMI LAN Selection: This feature displays the IPMI LAN setting. The default setting is Failover.
• IPMI Network Link Status: This feature displays the IPMI Network Link status. The default setting is Dedicated LAN.
• Station MAC Address: This feature displays the Station MAC address for this computer. Mac addresses are 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers.
• VLAN: This feature displays the status of VLAN support. The default setting is Disabled.
• IPv4 Address Source: This feature displays the source of IPv4 addresses. The default setting is Static.
• Station IP Address: This feature displays the Station IP address for this computer. This should be in decimal and in dotted quad form (i.e., 192.168.10.253).
• Subnet Mask: This feature displays the sub-network that this computer belongs to. The value of each three-digit number separated by dots should not exceed 255.
• Gateway IP Address: This feature displays the Gateway IP address for this computer. This should be in decimal and in dotted quad form (i.e., 192.168.10.253).

• IPv6 Address Status: This feature displays the IPv6 address status. The default setting is Disabled.

• Station IPv6 Address: This feature displays the station IPv6 address.

• Prefix Length: This item displays the prefix length.
• IPv6 Router IP Address: This feature displays the IPv6 router IP address.

Update IPMI LAN Configuration

Select Yes for the BIOS to implement all IP/MAC address changes upon next system boot. The options are No and Yes. If this option is set to Yes, the following items will display:

IPMI LAN Selection (Available when Update IPMI LAN Configuration is set to Yes)

Use this feature to select the type of the IPMI LAN. The options are Dedicated, Shared, and Failover.

VLAN

Select Enabled to enable IPMI VLAN function support. The default setting is Disabled.

Configuration Address Source

Use this feature to select the IP address source for this computer. If Static is selected, you will need to know the IP address of this computer and enter it to the system manually in the field. If DHCP is selected, AMI BIOS will search for a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server attached to the network and request the next available IP address for this computer. The options are DHCP and Static.

IPv6 Support: Select Enabled for IPv6 support. The options are Enabled, and Disabled. If this option is set to Enabled, the following item will display:

Configuration Address Source: Use this feature to select the IP address source for this computer. If Static is selected, you will need to know the IP address of this computer and enter it to the system manually in the field. If DHCP is selected, AMI BIOS will search for a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server attached to the network and request the next available IP address for this computer. The options are DHCP and Static

4.6 Security Settings

This menu allows the user to configure the following security settings for the system.

Password Description If ONLY the Administrator's password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and Is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the User's password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup the User will have Administrator rights. The password length must be in the following range: Minimum length 8 Maximum length 20 Administrator Password User Password Password Check [Setup] Secure Boot Set Administrator Password +: Select Screen TL: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Administrator Password

Use this feature to set the administrator password which is required to enter the BIOS setup utility. The length of the password should be from 3 characters to 20 characters long.

User Password

Use this feature to set the user password which is required to enter the BIOS setup utility. The length of the password should be from 3 characters to 20 characters long.

Password Check

Select Setup for the system to check for a password at Setup. Select Always for the system to check for a password at system boot and upon entering the BIOS Setup utility. The options are Setup and Always.

▶Secure Boot

When you select this submenu and press the key, the following items will display:

- System Mode

Secure Boot

Select Enabled to use Secure Boot settings. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Secure Boot Mode

Use this feature to select the desired secure boot mode for the system. The options are Standard and Custom.

CMS Support

If this feature is set to Enabled, legacy devices will be supported by the system. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Select Yes to restore manufacturer default keys used to ensure system security. The options are Yes and No.

▶Reset to Setup Mode

Select Yes to reset the system to the Setup Mode. The options are Yes and No.

▶Key Management

Vendor Keys

Factory Key Provision

Select Yes to install manufacturer default keys for system security use. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Select Yes to restore all manufacturer default keys for system security use. The options are Yes and No.

▶Reset to Setup Mode

This feature resets the system to Setup Mode.

▶Export Secure Boot Variables

This feature is used to copy the NVRAM content of Secure Boot variables to a storage device.

▶Enroll EFI Image

Select this feature and press to specify an EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) image for the system to use when it operates in the Secure Boot mode.

Device Guard Ready

▶Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB

Select Yes to remove UEFI CA from the database. The options are Yes and No.

Select Yes to restore database variables to the manufacturer default settings. The options are Yes and No.

Secure Boot Variable/Size/Keys/Key Source

▶Platform Key (PK)

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as platform firmware keys for the system. The sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the platform keys will be indicated as well. Select Update to update the platform key.

▶Key Exchange Keys

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Key-Exchange-Keys for the system. The sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the Key-Exchange-Keys will be indicated as well. Select Update to update your "Key Exchange Keys". Select Append to append your "Key Exchange Keys".

▶Authorized Signatures

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Authorized Signatures for the system. These values also indicate the sizes, keys numbers, and the sources of the authorized signatures. Select Update to update your "Authorized Signatures". Select Append to append your "Authorized Signatures". The settings are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete.

▶Forbidden Signatures

This feature allows the user to enter and configure a set of values to be used as Forbidden Signatures for the system. These values also indicate sizes, keys numbers, and key sources of the forbidden signatures. Select Update to update your "Forbidden Signatures". Select Append to append your "Forbidden Signatures". The settings are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete.

▶Authorized TimeStamps

This feature allows the user to set and save the timestamps for the authorized signatures which will indicate the time when these signatures are entered into the system. Select Update to update your "Authorized TimeStamps". Select Append to append your "Authorized TimeStamps". The settings are Update, and Append.

▶Os Recovery Signatures

This feature allows the user to set and save the authorized signatures used for OS recovery. Select Update to update your "OS Recovery Signatures". Select Append to append your "OS Recovery Signatures". The settings are Update, and Append.

4.7 Boot Settings

Use this feature to configure Boot Settings:

Antio Setup Utility - Copyright (CI) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPMI Security BOOT Save & Exit Boot mode select [DUAL] Legacy To EFI Support [Disabled] FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities Boot Option #1 [Hard Disk] Boot Option #2 [CD/DVD] Boot Option #3 [USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #4 [USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #5 [USB Key] Boot Option #6 [USB Floppy] Boot Option #7 [USB Lan] Boot Option #8 [Network: IBA KE (X550) Slot 0100 v2409] Boot Option #9 [UEFI Hard Disk] Boot Option #10 [UEFI CD/DVD] Boot Option #11 [UEFI USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #12 [UEFI USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #13 [UEFI USB Key] Boot Option #14 [UEFI USB Floppy] Boot Option #15 [UEFI USB Lan] Boot Option #16 [UEFI Network] Boot Option #17 [UEFI AF:UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell] Select boot mode LEGACY/UEFI +: Select Screen TL: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Boot Mode Select

Use this feature to select the type of devices from which the system will boot. The options are Legacy, UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and Dual.

Legacy to EFI Support

Select Enabled for the system to boot from an EFI OS when the Legacy OS fails. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

Fixed Boot Order Priorities

This feature prioritizes the order of a bootable device from which the system will boot. Press on each item sequentially to select devices.

When the item above - "Boot Mode Select" is set to Dual (default), the following items will be displayed for user's configuration:

- Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #17

When the item above -"Boot Mode Select" is set to Legacy, the following items will be displayed for configuration:

• Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #8

When the item above - "Boot Mode Select" is set to UEFI, the following items will be displayed for configuration:

• Boot Option #1 - Boot Option #9

Add New Boot Option

This feature allows the user to add a new boot option to the boot priority features for system boot.

Add Boot Option

Use this item to specify the name for the new boot option.

Path for Boot Option

Use this feature to enter the path for the new boot option in the format fsx:\path\filename.efi.

Boot Option File Path

Use this feature to specify the file path for the new boot option.

Create

After the name and the file path for the boot option are set, press to create the new boot option in the boot priority list.

▶ Delete Boot Option

Use this feature to select a boot device to delete from the boot priority list.

Delete Boot Option

Use this feature to remove an EFI boot option from the boot priority list.

▶ Add New Driver Option

Use this feature to select a new driver to add to the boot priority list.

Add Driver Option

Use this feature to specify the name of the driver to be added to the boot priority list.

Path for Drover Option

Use this feature to specify the path to the driver that will be added to the boot priority list.

Driver Option File Path

Use this feature to specify the file path of the driver that will be added to the boot priority list.

Create

After the driver option name and the file path are set, press to enter to submenu and click OK to create the new boot option drive.

▶ Delete Driver Option

Use this item to select a boot driver to delete from the boot priority list.

Delete Drive Option

Select the target boot driver to delete from the boot priority list.

▶ Hard Disk Drive BBS Priorities

- Boot Option #1 - #5

▶ USB Key Drive BBS Priorities

- Boot Option #1

▶ UEFI Application Boot Priorities

- Boot Option #1

▶ Network Drive BBS Priorities

- Boot Option #1

▶UEFI Application Boot Priorities

- Boot Option #1

4.8 Save & Exit

Select the Save & Exit menu from the BIOS setup screen to configure the settings below.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit Save Options Discard Changes and Exit Save Changes and Reset Save Changes Discard Changes Default Options Restore Optimized Defaults Save as User Defaults Restore User Defaults Boot Override IBA XE (X550) Slot 0100 v2409 UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup without saving any changes. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc.

Save Options

Discard Changes and Exit

Select this option to exit from the BIOS setup utility without making any permanent changes to the system configuration and reboot the computer.

Save Changes and Reset

When you have completed the system configuration changes, select this option to leave the BIOS setup utility and reboot the computer for the new system configuration parameters to become effective.

Save Changes

When you have completed the system configuration changes, select this option to save all changes made. This will not reset (reboot) the system.

Discard Changes

Select this option and press to discard all the changes you've made and return to the AMI BIOS setup utility.

Default Options

Restore Optimized Defaults

To set this feature, select Restore Defaults from the Exit menu and press to load manufacturer default settings which are intended for maximum system performance but not for maximum stability.

Save As User Defaults

To set this feature, select Save as User Defaults from the Exit menu and press . This enables the user to save all changes to the BIOS setup for future use.

To set this feature, select Restore User Defaults from the Exit menu and press . Use this feature to retrieve user-defined default settings that were saved previously.

Boot Override

This feature allows the user to override the Boot priorities sequence in the Boot menu, and immediately boot the system with a device specified by the user instead of the one specified in the boot list. This is a one-time override.

IBA XE (X550) Slot 0100 v2409

UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell

The Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) shell is effectively a small operating system built into the system motherboard on modern servers. This provides an environment for troubleshooting and maintenance outside of the operating system.

Launch EFI Shell from file system device

This feature allows to launch EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) shell from system devices.

Appendix A

BIOS Codes

A.1 BIOS Error POST (Beep) Codes

During the POST (Power-On Self-Test) routines, which are performed each time the system is powered on, errors may occur.

Non-fatal errors are those which, in most cases, allow the system to continue the boot-up process. The error messages normally appear on the screen.

Fatal errors are those which will not allow the system to continue the boot-up procedure. If a fatal error occurs, you should consult with your system manufacturer for possible repairs.

The fatal errors are usually communicated through repeated patterns of audible beeps. Each pattern of audible beeps listed below corresponds to its respective error.

BIOS Beep (POST) Codes
Beep Code Error	Message Description
1 beep Refresh Circuits have been reset (Ready to power up)
5 short, 1 long Memory error No memory detected in system
5 long, 2 short Display memory read/write error Video adapter missing or with faulty memory
1 long continuous System OH System overheat condition

A.2 Additional BIOS POST Codes

The AMI BIOS supplies additional checkpoint codes, which are documented online at http://www.supermicro.com/support/manuals/ ("AMI BIOS POST Codes User's Guide").

When BIOS performs the Power On Self Test, it writes checkpoint codes to I/O port 0080h. If the computer cannot complete the boot process, a diagnostic card can be attached to the computer to read I/O port 0080h (Supermicro p/n AOC-LPC80-20).

For information on AMI updates, please refer to http://www.ami.com/products/.

Appendix B

Software

After the hardware has been installed, you can install the Operating System (OS), configure RAID settings and install the drivers.

B.1 Microsoft Windows OS Installation

If you will be using RAID, you must configure RAID settings before installing the Windows OS and the RAID driver. Refer to the RAID Configuration User Guides posted on our website at www.supermicro.com/support/manuals.

Installing the OS

1. Create a method to access the MS Windows installation ISO file. That might be a DVD, perhaps using an external USB/SATA DVD drive, or a USB flash drive, or the IPMI KVM console.
2. Retrieve the proper RST/RSTe driver. Go to the Supermicro web page for your motherboard and click on "Download the Latest Drivers and Utilities", select the proper driver, and copy it to a USB flash drive.
3. Boot from a bootable device with Windows OS installation. You can see a bootable device list by pressing F11 during the system startup.

Please select boot device: ATEN Virtual CDROM YSOJ → IPMI virtual drive (Legacy) ASUS SDRW-08D2S-U F601 → USB DVD device (Legacy) USB FLASH DRIVE PMAP → USB flash drive with OS installation (Legacy) IBA 40-10G Slot 1900 v1060 → PXE boot (Legacy) UEFI: ATEN Virtual CDROM YSOJ → IPMI virtual drive (UEFI) UEFI: ASUS SDRW-08D2S-U F601 → USB DVD device (UEFI) UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell Enter Setup ↑ and ↓ to move selection ENTER to select boot device ESC to boot using defaults

Figure B-1. Select Boot Device

1. During Windows Setup, continue to the dialog where you select the drives on which to install Windows. If the disk you want to use is not listed, click on "Load driver" link at the bottom left corner.

Where do you want to install Windows? Name Total size Free space Type Refresh Delete Format New Load driver Extend We couldn't find any drives. To get a storage driver, click Load driver. Next

Figure B-2. Load Driver Link

To load the driver, browse the USB flash drive for the proper driver files.

• For RAID, choose the SATA/sSATA RAID driver indicated then choose the storage drive on which you want to install it.

• For non-RAID, choose the SATA/sSATA AHCI driver indicated then choose the storage drive on which you want to install it.

• Once all devices are specified, continue with the installation.

• After the Windows OS installation has completed, the system will automatically reboot multiple times.

B.2 Driver Installation

The Supermicro website contains drivers and utilities for your system at https://www.supermicro.com/wftp/driver. Some of these must be installed, such as the chipset driver.

After accessing the website, go into the CDR_Images (in the parent directory of the above link) and locate the ISO file for your motherboard. Download this file to a USB flash drive or a DVD. (You may also use a utility to extract the ISO file if preferred.)

Another option is to go to the Supermicro website at http://www.supermicro.com/products/. Find the product page for your motherboard, and "Download the Latest Drivers and Utilities".

Insert the flash drive or disk and the screenshot shown below should appear.

SUPERMICRO X11DPS-R Motherboard Drivers & Tools (Win10) Intel C627 Chipset X11DPS-R SUPERMICRO Computer Inc. Intel Chipset INF files Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5.2 (Optional) ASPEED Graphics Driver Intel Rapid Storage Technology Enterprise Intel USB 3.0 Drivers Intel PRO Network Connections Drivers SUPERMICRO SuperDoctor 5 Build driver diskettes and manuals Browse CD Auto Start Up Next Time For more information, please visit SUPERMICRO's web site.

Figure B-3. Driver & Tool Installation Screen

Note: Click the icons showing a hand writing on paper to view the readme files for each item. Click the computer icons to the right of these items to install each item (from top to the bottom) one at a time. After installing each item, you must re-boot the system before moving on to the next item on the list. The bottom icon with a CD on it allows you to view the entire contents.

B.3 SuperDoctor® 5

The Supermicro SuperDoctor 5 is a program that functions in a command-line or web-based interface for Windows and Linux operating systems. The program monitors such system health information as CPU temperature, system voltages, system power consumption, fan speed, and provides alerts via email or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

SuperDoctor 5 comes in local and remote management versions and can be used with Nagios to maximize your system monitoring needs. With SuperDoctor 5 Management Server (SSM Server), you can remotely control power on/off and reset chassis intrusion for multiple systems with SuperDoctor 5 or IPMI. SuperDoctor 5 Management Server monitors HTTP, FTP, and SMTP services to optimize the efficiency of your operation.

Note: The default User Name and Password for SuperDoctor 5 is ADMIN / ADMIN.

SuperDoctor 5 Matherboard: C7B366-CB-ML Voltage 10V 20V 30V 40V 50V 60V 70V 80V 90V 100V 110V 120V 130V 140V 150V 160V 170V 180V 190V 200V 210V 220V 230V 240V 250V 260V 270V 280V 290V 300V 310V 320V 330V 340V 350V 360V 370V 380V 390V 400V 410V 420V 430V 440V 450V 460V 470V 480V 490V 500V 510V 520V 530V 540V 550V 560V 570V 580V 590V 600V 610V 620V 630V 640V 650V 660V 670V 680V 690V 700V 710V 720V 730V 740V 750V 760V 770V 780V 790V 800V 810V 820V 830V 840V 850V 860V 870V 880V 890V 900V 910V 920V 930V 940V 950V 960V 970V 980V 990V 1000V 1010V 1020V 1030V 1040V 1050V 1060V 1070V 1080V 1090V 1100V 1110V 1120V 1130V 1140V 1150V 1160V 1170V 1180V 1190V 1200V 1210V 1220V 1230V 1240V 1250V 1260V 1270V 1280V 1290V 1300V 1310V 1320V 1330V 1340V 1350V 1360V 1370V 1380V 1390V 1400V

Figure B-4. SuperDoctor 5 Interface Display Screen (Health Information)

B.4 IPMI

The [motherboard models] supports the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI). IPMI is used to provide remote access, monitoring and management. There are several BIOS settings that are related to IPMI.

For general documentation and information on IPMI, please visit our website at: http://www.supermicro.com/products/nfo/IPMI.cfm.

B.5 Logging into the BMC (Baseboard Management Controller)

Supermicro ships standard products with a unique password for the BMC user. This password can be found on a label on the motherboard.

When logging in to the BMC for the first time, please use the unique password provided by Supermicro to log in. You can change the unique password to a user name and password of your choice for subsequent logins.

For more information regarding BMC passwords, please visit our website at http://www.supermicro.com/bmcpassword.

Appendix C

Standardized Warning Statements

The following statements are industry standard warnings, provided to warn the user of situations which have the potential for bodily injury. Should you have questions or experience difficulty, contact Supermicro's Technical Support department for assistance. Only certified technicians should attempt to install or configure components.

Read this section in its entirety before installing or configuring components.

These warnings may also be found on our website at http://www.supermicro.com/about/policies/safety_information.cfm.

Battery Handling

Warning! There is the danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions

電池の取り扱い

Warning! Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.

製品の廃棄

Warning: Do not upgrade the BIOS unless your system has a BIOS-related issue. Flashing the wrong BIOS can cause irreparable damage to the system. In no event shall Supermicro be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising from a BIOS update. If you need to update the BIOS, do not shut down or reset the system while the BIOS is updating to avoid possible boot failure.

D.1 Overview

The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) provides a software-based interface between the operating system and the platform firmware in the pre-boot environment. The UEFI specification supports an architecture-independent mechanism that will allow the UEFI OS loader stored in an external storage device to boot the system. The UEFI offers clean, hands-off management to a computer during system boot.

D.2 Recovering the UEFI BIOS Image

A UEFI BIOS flash chip consists of a recovery BIOS block and a main BIOS block (a main BIOS image). The recovery block contains critical BIOS codes, including memory detection and recovery codes for the user to flash a healthy BIOS image if the original main BIOS image is corrupted. When the system power is turned on, the recovery block codes execute first. Once this process is complete, the main BIOS code will continue with system initialization and the remaining POST (Power-On Self-Test) routines.

Note 1: Follow the BIOS recovery instructions in Section D.3 for BIOS recovery when the main BIOS block crashes.

Note 2: If the recovery instructions in Section D.3 for BIOS recovery fail, you may use the Supermicro Update Manager (SUM) Out-of-Band (OOB) (https://www.supermicro.com.tw/products/nfo/SMS_SUM.cfm) to reflash the BIOS.

Note 3: If the recovery block processes stated in Note 1 and Note 2 above fail, you will need to follow the procedures to make a Returned Merchandise Authorization (RMA) request. Refer to Section 3.5 for more information about the RMA request.

D.3 Recovering the Main BIOS Block with a USB Device

This feature allows the user to recover the main BIOS image using a USB-attached device without additional utilities used. A USB flash device such as a USB Flash Drive, or a USB CD/DVD ROM/RW device can be used for this purpose. However, a USB hard disk drive cannot be used for BIOS recovery at this time. The file system supported by the recovery block is FAT (including FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32) which is installed on a bootable or non-bootable USB-attached device.

To perform UEFI BIOS recovery using a USB-attached device, follow the instructions below.

1. Please use a different machine to download the BIOS package for your motherboard or your system from the product page available on our website at www.supermicro.com.
2. Extract the BIOS package to a USB device and rename the BIOS ROM file [BIOSname#.###] that is included in the BIOS package to SUPER.ROM for BIOS recovery use.
3. Copy the SUPER.ROM file into the Root "\" directory of the USB device.

Note: Before recovering the main BIOS image, confirm that the SUPER.ROM file you have is the same version or a close version meant for your motherboard.

1. Insert the USB device that contains the SUPER.ROM file into the system before you power on the system or when the following screen appears.

BMC IP:10.132.160.92 PEI--Could Not Find Recovery Image... 07

1. After locating the SUPER.ROM file, the system will enter the BIOS Recovery menu as shown below.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPM Recovery Security Boot Save a Exit System booted from new image Partial update is not allowed Single preservation ▶ Processed with Flash update Set this option to preserve OMBOS +: Select Screen I: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Out. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Note: At this point, you may decide if you want to start the BIOS recovery. If you decide to proceed with BIOS recovery, follow the procedures below.

1. When the screen as shown above displays, use the arrow keys to select the item "Proceed with flash update" and press the key. You will see the BIOS recovery progress as shown in the screen below.

Note: Do not interrupt the BIOS flashing process until it is complete.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright 1C7 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Recovery HANDIN0! System firmware is being updated. Keyboard is locked. DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF 11 Once firmware update is completed press any key to reboot the system Flash Update updating main firmware 173 +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Entani Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Same & Exit ESOG: Exit Version $0.00.1976. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. After the BIOS recovery process is complete, press any key to reboot the system.

Active Setup Utility - Copyright (CI 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Recovery WARNING System firmware is being updated. Keyboard is locked. DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF !!! Once firmware update is completed press any key to reboot the system Flash update Flash update completed. Press any key to reset the system +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F3: Previous Values- F4: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.15.1956. Copyright (CI) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Note: It is recommended that you update your BIOS after BIOS recovery. Please refer to Chapter 3 for BIOS update instructions.

1. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. From the top of the tool bar, select Boot to enter the submenu. From the submenu list, select Boot Option #1 as shown below. Then, set Boot Option #1 to [UEFI AP:UEFI: Built-in EFI Shell]. Press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (CI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPM Security ESCOT Save & Exit Boot Configuration Boot mode select [00ML] LEGACY to EFI support [Disabled] FIXED BOOT UPDATE Priorities Boot Option #1 [UEFI MP/UEFI: No...] Boot Option #2 [GO/DVD] Boot Option #3 [UGS Hard Disk] Boot Option #4 [USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #5 [USB Key/SanDisk] Boot Option #6 [USB Floppy] Boot Option #7 [USB Lan] Boot Option #8 [Network: IBM SE SI...] Boot Option #9 [UEFI Hard Disk] Boot Option #10 [UEFI CD/DVD] Boot Option #11 [UEFI USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #12 [UEFI USB CD/DVD] Boot Option #13 [UEFI USB Key/UEFI...] Boot Option #14 [UEFI USB Floppy] Boot Option #15 [UEFI USB Lan] Boot Option #16 [UEFI Network] Boot Option #17 [Hard Disk] Add New Boot Option Sets the system boot order +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enteri Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.126. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. When the UEFI Shell prompt appears, type fs# to change the device directory path. Go to the directory that contains the BIOS package you extracted earlier from Step 1. Enter flash.nsh BIOSname#.### at the prompt to start the BIOS update process.

LEFI Interactive Shell v2.1 ESK 11 LEFI v2.50 (American Regatrends, 0x0089XXC) Mapping table: F5D: A106(0):H0D(F0):BLK1; PcJW01(0x0)/PcI(0x14,0x0)/US$(0x11,0x0)/HOI_MER_0xG7901072_0x806_0x1 OR3532) BLK0: Rile(s): PcJW01(0x0)/PcI(0x14,0x0)/US$(0x11,0x0) Press ESCB is 1 seconds to skip startup.moh or any other key to continue. Shell (f5d) F5D:\ CD BLKOS F5D:VAPLOOS> CD SKAPME2.0362017 F5D:VAPLOOS:SKAPME2.0362017\ flash.nsh X13P07.5X

Note: Do not interrupt this process until the BIOS flashing is complete.

Done. [Access Oms Port Ex] Index 0x51: 0x18 Done. ********************************************************************** * Program BIOS and ME (including RDT) regions... ********************************************************************** AMI Firmware Update Utility v5.09.01.1317 Copyright ©2017 American Registrends Inc. All Rights Reserved. OPUD = 50652 Reading Flash ....... done - ME Data Size checking . ok - FFS checksums ....... ok - Check RowLayout ....... ok Erasing Boot Block ....... done Updating Boot Block ....... done Verifying Boot Block ....... done Zroving Mesh Block ....... 0x00152000 (OK)

1. The screen above indicates that the BIOS update process has completed. Reboot the system when you see the screen below.

Verifying NCR Book ....... done - Update success for FEM - Update success for EE - - Successful Update Recovery Loader to (PRx!! - Successful Update MFSB11- - Successful Update RTM11- - Successful Update NFx, [081 and 19021] - Successful Update FLOD and UTOx!! - ME entire (new update success !!) wRIVINC : System must power-sif to have the changes take effect! Moving F501:WFUD005/SKJPME2_03162037/40x64,efi -> F501:WFUD005/SKJPME2_03162017/f df.sac - [ok] Moving F501:WFUD005/SKJPME2_03162037/aufemfix4,efi -> F501:WFUD005/SKJPME2_0316201 ?afuefu1.sac - [ok] ********************************************************************** * * Please ignore this 'shell cannot read from file - device error' * Warning message due to it does not impact flashing process. * ********************************************************************** putating * Delete successful. F501->

Appendix E

Configuring VROC RAID Settings

Intel® Virtual RAID on CPU (Intel® VROC) is a RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) solution that integrates with Intel® Volume Management Device (Intel® VMD) for Non-Volatile Memory Express (NVMe) solid-state drives (SSDs). The E.1 section provides instructions on how to access the All Intel VMD Controller menu. The E.2 section provides instructions on how to configure RAID settings. The E.3 section describes the use of journaling drive for the RAID5 volume (parity based RAID).

Note 1: Only use NVMe devices that have been validated by Supermicro. For the latest updates, please contact us or refer to our website at https://www.supermicro.com.

Note 2: Depending on the version of driver/utility/package, it may or may not have exactly the same as the BIOS settings/features shown in the appendix.

E.1 All Intel VMD Controllers Menu

The following section provide you with instructions on how to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu which will allow you to enable a selected PCI slot for VMD support.

Enabling a PCI Slot for VMD Support in the BIOS Setup Utility

1. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility.
2. Use the arrow key to select Advanced on top of the BIOS menu bar.
3. Use the down arrow key to select Chip Configuration and press .
4. Select North Bridge and press .

5. Use the down arrow key to select IIO Configuration and press .

6. When the following screen displays, use the down arrow key to select Intel® VMD Technology and press to enter the Intel® VMD Technology submenu.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. IIO Configuration Press to bring up the Intel® VMD for Volume Management Device Configuration menu. IIO-PCIE Express Global Options PCIe Hot Plug [Disable] PCI-E Completion Timeout (Global) [No] Disable +: Select Screen ↑: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1275. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. When the Intel® VMD Technology submenu appears, it will display all the PCI slots that can be configured for VMD support on the screen.

2. From the available PCI slots displayed on the screen, select a PCI slot you want to use for a VMD device by highlighting it.

3. Select the option [Enable] and press to enable the selected slot for VMD support.

4. Repeat Step 8 \~ Step 9 to select and enable all the PCI slots of your choice for VMD support.

5. After enabling all PCI slots for VMD support on the BIOS Setup utility, install the VMD devices (such as add-on cards) on the slots that you've configured for VMD support on the motherboard. For the changes to take effect,

6. Press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility.

Note: After you've enabled VMD in the BIOS on a PCIe slot of your choice, this PCIe slot will be dedicated for VMD use only, and it will no longer support any PCIe device. To re-activate this slot for PCIe use, please disable VMD in the BIOS.

1. Navigate to the Advanced tab.

Action Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main: Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Dave & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server NE Information ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCH SATA Configuration ▶ PCIe/PCI/PNT Configuration ▶ Super 10 Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ACP1 Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ HTTP POST Configuration ▶ TLS Authenticate Configuration ▶ ICOM Configuration ▶ IntelRI Virtual RAID on CPU ▶ Driver Health This format allows the user to manage Inte(10K) Virtual RAID on CPU +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Dot. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1074. Copyright 1G1 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

1. Use the arrow keys to select Intel(R) Virtual RAID on CPU and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear showing that the feature "All Intel VMD Controllers" has become available.

Intel(R) VHD with VHD Technology 6.0.0.1024 Upgrade key: Intel-SSD-only No RHD volumes on the stars Intel VHD Managed Controllers: All Intel VHD Controllers Select to see more information about the Intel VHD Controllers +: Select Screen T4: Object Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2013 American MegaThrems, Inc.

Note 1: The license and header (on the motherboard) for Intel® VROC hardware key are required. Also, be sure the version of Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) VROC utility is 5 or above (look for Intel(R) VROC with VMD Technology x.x.x.xxxx shown on the screen).

Note 2: Intel® VROC Premium hardware key is used in the appendix to demonstrate RAID settings.

1. Use the arrow keys to select All Intel VMD Controllers and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear. It allows the user to create RAID volumes and configure settings of NVMe devices as detected by the system.

All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume Non-Raid Physical Disks: ► INTEL SSDPE2HE01274 SN:FM0D71400DDIP0HGN, 1117.8188 Fort 310, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD, BDF 09:00.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2HE01274 SN:FM0D624000FFP0HGN, 1117.8188 Fort 310, Slot 97, CPU0, VMD, BDF 04:00.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2HE01274 SN:FM0D62400LZFP0HEN, 1117.8188 Fort 210, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD, BDF 00:00.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2HE01274 SN:FM0D62400OKIP0HGN, 1117.8188 Fort 210, Slot 97, CPU1, VMD, BDF 04:00.0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter! Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save U Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note : A single Intel® VMD supported processor supplies 48 PCIe lanes and contains three Intel® VMD controllers (domains). Refer to the following illustration for more information.

graph TD
    subgraph Processor
        A["Processor"] -->|UPI| B["Processor"]
    end
    subgraph NVMe Device
        C["NVMe Device"] --> D["NVMe Device"]
    end
    A <-->|UPI| B
    C <-->|UPI| B
    D <-->|UPI| B
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

* Data RAID will be allowed to cross VMDs and processors. * Boot RAID will NOT be

able to cross VMDs.

E.2 Configuring RAID Settings

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu items, the following screen will appear. Please carefully follow the instructions listed in this section to configure RAID settings for your devices as desired.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC) 2019 American Mesatrends, Inc. Advanced All Intel VHD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume Non-RID Physical Disks: ► INTEL SSPEZMED1274 SN:CM0717400DDLP3HEN, 1117.8188 Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD, BDF 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSPEZMED1274 SN:FM0624200DFIP3HEN, 1117.8188 Port 3:0, Slot 37, CPU0, VMD, BDF 04:00.0 ► INTEL SSPEZMED1274 ON:FM0624100L2P3HEN, 1117.8188 Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 03:00.0 ► INTEL SSPEZMED1274 SN:FM0624200RF3HEN, 1117.8188 Port 2:0, Slot 37, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 04:00.0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +: Select Screen 11: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Have a Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1974. Copyright (C) 2019 American Mesatrends, Inc.

To Create a RAID Volume

Use the arrow keys to select Create RAID Volume from the screen above and press to create a RAID Volume. The Create RAID Volume submenu, which allows you to configure the settings of the RAID volume you've created, will appear as shown below.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Nestrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume Name: RAID LEVEL: Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controllers: Select Disks: INTEL: SEDPE2NE01274 SND:AMD0174008IP26GN, 1117.01GB Port 2:0 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL: SEDPE2NE01274 SND:PHD6E42900F IP26GN, 1117.01GB Port 5:0 CPU0 VMD2 INTEL: SEDPE2NE01274 SND:PHD6E4300CLIP26GN, 1117.01GB Port 2:0 CPU1 VMD1 INTEL: SEDPE2NE01274 SND:PHD6E4300GRIP26GN, 1117.01GB Port 2:0 CPU1 VMD1 Strip Size: Capacity (SD): Create Volume Volume (RADD(Stripel) I I [ I ] [ I ] [ I ] [ I ] [ I ] [ I ] [ I ] Enter a unique volume here that does not contain space at the beginning or backslash and is in 6 characters or less. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter! Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EICI Exit Version $30.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Nestrends, Inc.

To Enter a Name for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu as shown on the previous screen, use the arrow keys to select Name and press , and the following screen will display.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume NAME: RAID Levels: Enable RAID scanned over VMP Controllers: Select Disks: INTIL SSDPE2M01274 SN:CM0T174080IP26GN, 1117.81GB Fort S10 CPU0 VMD INTIL SSDPE2M031274 SN:FM065200CFIP26GN, 1117.81GB Fort S10 CPU0 VMD INTIL SSDPE2M031274 SN:FM065200CLIP26GN, 1117.81GB Fort S10 CPU0 VMD INTIL SSDPE2M031274 SN:FM065200VRIP26GN, 1117.81GB Fort S10 CPU0 VMD Strip Size: Capacity (SB): Create Volume Volume (RADD StriEnd) I I NAME: VOLUME# +:- Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Enter a unique volume name That does not contain space at the beginning or backslash and is 16 Characters or less. Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

When the screen above displays, enter a unique name for the RAID volume.

To Set the RAID Level for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, select RAID Level and press . The following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright ICJ 2019 American Regretrends, Inc. ADVANCED Create RAID Volume Name: VOLUME RAID Level: HRAIDO(Stripe) Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controller: Select Disks: INTEL: BDDF2NE012T4 [ ] SM:DM0717400BIP2SHN, J117.81GB Port RAID Level: 310 CPU0 VMD2 RAIDO(Stripe) INTEL: BDDF2NE012T4 [ ] SN:PHODE54200UF IP2SHN, J117.81GB Port RAID(Stripe) 310 CPU0 VMD2 RAID(Stripe) INTEL: SSDF2NE012T4 [ ] SN:PHODE54100LF IP2SHN, J117.81GB Port RAID(Stripe) 210 CPU0 VMD1 [ ] INTEL: BDDF2NE012T4 [ ] SN:PHODE54200VR IP2SHN, J117.81GB Port RAID(Stripe) 210 CPU0 VMD1 Strip Size: [129-BI] Capacity (SD): 0.00 Create Volume Select RAID Level ++ Select Screen TI: Select Item enter: Select +/-r Change Opt. F1: General Help FE: Previous Values FS: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.30.3274, Copyright (KC) 2019 American Regretrends, Inc.

Use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID level for the RAID volume that you've created. The options are RAID0(Stripe), RAID1(Mirror), RAID5(Parity), and RAID10(RAID0+1).

Note 1: The RAID level(s) displayed is(are) based on the number of NVMe devices connected to the system.

Note 2: For RAID0/RAID1/RAID5/RAID10, the minimum number of NVMe devices required is two/two/three/four respectively.

Note 3: Use Intel® VROC Standard hardware key to support RAID 0/1/10. Use Intel® VROC Premium hardware key (or Intel SSD Only hardware key) to support RAID 0/1/5/10.

Enabling RAID Spanned over VMD Controllers

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Enter RAID spanned over VMD Controllers and press . The following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Create RAID Volume Name: Volume RAID Levels: [RND0(stripel)] Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controllers: Select Discs: INTEL: BDDFE2ME012T4 SIN:CMD71400BIP26GN, 1117.81GB Port SIN:PHODE2K00UFIP26GN SIN:CPU: VMD2 INTEL: BDDFE2ME012T4 SIN:PHODE3K00UFIP26GN, 1117.81GB Port SIN:CPU: VMD1 INTEL: BDDFE2ME012T4 SIN:PHODE3K00UFIP26GN, 1117.81GB Port SIN:CPU: VMD1 Strip Size: [15KB] Capacity (GD): 0.00 Create Volume Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controllers: +:- Select Screens T1: Select Iron Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.30.1274. Copyright iCI 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Enter a desired setting for your RAID volume in the pop-up menu. The options are (not selected) and X (selected). Please set this feature to X if the RAID level you selected earlier from Step 3 will cross VMD domains.

Note: For a bootable RAID volume, do not cross VMD domains.

To Select Disks for the RAID Volumes

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to highlight Select Disk: and press . The following screen will display.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. RIVIAND Name: RAID Level: Enable RAID connected over VMD Controllers: Select Disk: INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:DM0717400601P2KKN, 1117.810B Port S30 CPU0 WD2 INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:PN0717400601P2KKN, 1117.810B Port B:0 CPU0 WD2 3:0 CPU: INTEL SSDPE2ME012T4 SN:PN062E000R1P2KKN, 1117.810B Port 2:0 CPU0 WD2 Strip Size: Capacity (GB): [12KB] Create Volume Select at least two disks X - to Select Disk ++, Select Screen T4: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit

The options are (not selected) and X (selected). Set the features one by one to X to select the desired RAID disks for your RAID volumes.

To Set Strip Size for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Strip Size: and press . The following screen will display.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright 1C? 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Name: Volume:0 [RAIDO(Stripe)] MAID Level: Enable RAID scanned over VMD I ] Controllers: Select Disks: INTEL: SDPE2M01274 SIN:DM07134008IP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPUV VMD INTEL: SDPE2M01274 SIN:PM0624000IP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 310 CPUV VMD INTEL: SDPE2M01274 SIN:PM0624000IP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPUV VMD INTEL: SDPE2M01274 SIN:PM0624000IP2HGN, 1117.81GB Port 2:0 CPUV VMD Strip Size: 4KB 8KB 16KB 32KB 64KB 128KB Strip size help +: Select Screens T1: Select Tres Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F3: Previous Values F5: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESU: Exit Strip Size: [128KB] Capacity (USB): 0.00 Create Volume: Select at least two disks Version 2.20.1274. Copyright 1C? 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

From the pop-up menu as shown above, select the desired RAID strip size for your RAID volume and press . The options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB.

Note: For RAID5, the options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB. For RAID10, the options are 4KB, 8KB, 16KB, 32KB, and 64KB.

To Set the Capacity (GB) for the RAID Volume

From the Create RAID Volume submenu, use the arrow keys to select Capacity (GB): and press . The following screen will display.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Name: Volume RiAD Levels [RiADo(Stripe)] Enable RiAD scanned over VMD Controller: Select disks INTEL SSPE2MEDI2T4 SN:DMDT74000IP25HN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU VMD2 INTEL SSPE2MEDI2T4 SN:PARD624000IP25HN, 1117.8108 Port 310 CPU VMD2 INTEL SSPE2MEDI2T4 SN:PARD624000IP25HN, 1117.8108 Port 210 CPU VMD1 INTEL SSPE2MEDI2T4 SN:PARD624000IP25HN, 1117.8108 Port 210 CPU VMD1 Strim Size [129/6] Capacity (MB): 0.00 Create Volume Select at least two disks Capacity in GB +:- Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Updated Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Enter the desired RAID capacity (in GB) in the pop-up menu to set the capacity for your RAID volume.

To Create Volumes

To finalize your RAID volume configuration, select Create Volume from the Create RAID Volume submenu as shown on the screen below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc. Advanced Name: RAID LEVEL: Enable RAID scanned over VMD Controllers: Select DISNR: INTEL: SSDFE2HE01274 SM:CM071340080IP2HN1, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD INTEL: SSDFE2HE01274 SM:PHD6242000IP2HN1, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD INTEL: SSDFE2HE01274 SM:PHD624100LZIP2HN1, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD INTEL: SSDFE2HE01274 SM:PHD6242000IP2HN1, 1117.81GB Port 3:0 CPU0 VMD Strip Size: Capacity (GB): Create Value: Volume: [READ(Striper)] I I IXI IXI I I [128KB] 2125.00 Create a volume with the settings specified above +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESCK Exit Version 8.26.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc.

After selecting Create Volume, press . The following screen will appear and display RAID volumes as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID Volume: ► Volume0, RAID0(Stripe), 2123.83GB, Normal Non-RMID Physical Disk ► INTEL SSDPE2MED1274 SN:FM062F4100.ZIP3HEN, 1117.81KB Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 03:00,0 ► INTEL SSDPE2MED1274 SN:FM062F4000.RIP3HEN, 1117.81KB Port 2:0, Slot 3T, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 04:00,0 This page allows you to create a RAID volume +:- Select Screen T4: Object Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit E00: Exit Version 3.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Display RAID Volumes

For detailed RAID volume information, use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID volume as shown below.

AutoIO Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrnds, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID volume: ► Volume0, VMD(Strike), 833.858B, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disk: ► INTEL BDEP2M01274 SN:FM0674100LZIP3H0N, 1117.810B Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 09:00,0 ► INTEL BDEP2M01274 SN:FM0674100LZIP3H0N, 1117.810B Port 2:0, Slot 3T, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 04:00,0 Select to see more Information about the RAID Volume +: Select Screen T4: Select Area Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrnds, Inc.

To Display RAID VOLUME Information

When the screen above appears, press . The RAID VOLUME INFO menu will appear and display the detailed information about the RAID volume you've selected as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced PAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions ► Delete Name: Volume0 PAID Level: PAID(Striue) Strip Size: 128KB Size: 2123.0066 Status: Normal Bootable: Yes BLOCK 0100: 512 PAID Member Blocks: ► INTEL SEDPE2MED1274 SN:CM07174000D1P2HON, 1117.0100 Port 010, 01st 4, CPU0, VH02, EDP 03:00,0 ► INTEL SEDPE2MED1274 SN:PHODG2400F3P8HON, 1117.0100 Port 010, 01st 37, CPU0, VH02, EDP 04:00,0 +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Customized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESD# Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright: ICI 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Delete a RAID Volume

On the RAID VOLUME INFO menu, use the arrow keys to select Delete and press to delete the RAID volume you have selected.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright 107 2019 American Mesatrends, Inc. Advanced HAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: Volume# RAID Level: RATIO(Str/low) Strip Size: 120KB Size: 2183.80GB Status: Normal Bootable: Yes BLOCK SIZE: 512 RAID Member Disk: INTEL: SEDPE2MEO1274 SN=CWD7174008DIP3GDN, 1117.8100 Port 3to, Slot 4, CPU0, WMZ, EDF 03:00.0 INTEL: SEDPE2MEO1274 SN=PHO6C4200F3PSHON, 1117.8100 Port 3to, Slot 3T, CPU0, WMZ, EDF 04:00.0 +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E00: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright 107 2019 American Mesatrends, Inc.

The following screen will appear to confirm if you want to delete the RAID Volume. Select Yes to delete the RAID Volume. The options are Yes and No.

Hotio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Delete Delete the RAID Volume? ALL DATA ON VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Yes No Deleting a volume will reset the disks to non-RAID. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit E0D: Exit Version 2.20.1174. Copyright 4CL 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Reset the RAID Volume to non-RAID

On the RAID VOLUME INFO submenu shown on the bottom screen of page 169, select the desired NVMe device from the list of RAID Member Disks and press as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume ACTIONS Delete Name: Volume RAID Level: RAID(Stripe) Strip Size: 12000 Size: 5123.8000 Status: Normal Bootpoint: Yes Block Size: S12 RAID NUMBER DIAS: INTEL SDPE2ME01274 ON:CAN:174.00EIP/DMN, 1117.8100 Fact ID: 040, 031st ST, CPUQ, NMQ, EDF 04:00.0 INTEL SDPE2ME01274 ON:PHMDC64.00EIP/DMN, 1117.8100 Fact ID: 040, 031st ST, CPUQ, NMQ, EDF 04:00.0 ++: Select Screen T1: Select Item S###: Select +--: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Ease B Exit ESD: Exit

Select Reset to Non-RAID from the screen below and press to remove RAID data from the selected NVMe device.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hapatrends, Inc. advanced INTEL: SSOPE2NE012T4 ON: CM7374006DIP2NDN, 1117.8108 Disk Options: ▶ Load To Run RAID ▶ Turn Locate LED On Controller: Volume Management Device Controller Model Numbers: INTEL SSOPE2NE012T4 Serial Number: CM7374006DIP2NDN Sizes: 1117.8108 Status: RAID Member Block Size: 512 Boot Port Number: 3 Boot Port Effect: 0 Slot Number: 4 Socket Number: 0 AMD Controller Number: 2 PCI BestDevice-Function: G3500.0 Remove RAID data from the disk +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESDA: Exit Version: 2.25.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hapatrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that you want to set the selected NVMe device to non-RAID. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Reset to non-RAID Remove RAID structure on disk? Yes No Removes RAID data from the disk +:- Select Screen 11: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit! EOG: Exit Version 3.20.1776. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To Turn on the Disk Locator LED

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen displays, select a non-RAID physical disk to turn on the disk locator LED to locate a selected device.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Mavericks, Inc. Advanced All Intel VHD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID Volume: ► Volume0, RAID(Stride), 2123.8568, Normal NOR-RHID PHYSICAL UDRASI INTL: 80052NE01274 501FAM0614200.2720EN, 1117.0138 Port: 2:0, Slot 4, OPUL, VMD1, BDF 03:00.0 INTL: 80052NE01274 501FAM0614200.2720EN, 1117.0138 Port: 2:0, Slot 37, OPUL, VMD1, BDF 04:00.0 Select to see more Information about the disk +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Off. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Case & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.26.1974. Copyright (C) 2019 American Mavericks, Inc.

You can also select a RAID member disk to locate the selected device.

RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS ► Delete Name: Volume9 RAID Level: RAID(Stripe) Strip Size: 120KB Size: 2125.800B Status: Normal Bootable: Yes Block Size: 312 RAID Member Disks. ► INTEL: SEFPE2M6E1274 SEFPM06E42000EFP6HON, 1117.810B Port: S10, S1st 4, CPU0, VMU2, BDF 09100.0 ► INTEL: SEFPE2M6E1274 SEFPM06E42000EFP6HON, 1117.810B Port: S10, S1st 37, CPU0, VMU2, BDF 04:00.0 +: Select Screen I4: Select Iron Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, use the arrow keys to select Turn Locate LED On. Press to turn on the locator LED to show the location of the selected device.

Create RAID Volume: INTL: SSDPE2HE01274 ON: PMOS6D4100LZIPSHGN, 1117.B108 Disk Actions: Mark as Bars: Mark as Jacking Drive RUN Software Ltd On Controller: Volume Management Device Controller Model Number: INTEL: SSDPE2HE01274 Serial Number: PMOS6D4100LZIPSHGN Size: 1117.01GB Status: Non-RAID Block Size: 512 Root Port Number: 2 Root Port Offset: 0 Slot Number: 4 Socket Number: 1 AMD Controller Numbers: 1 PCI bus?Device.Function: US$0.0 << Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESOx Exit version 2.30.1274, Copyright (C) 2015 American Guatemala, DTC.

To Mark a RAID Volume as Spare

Follow the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen appears, select a desired NVMe device from the list of Non-RAID Physical Disks.

All Intel VMD Controllers ► Create RAID Volume RAID Volume: ► Volume, RAID(Stride), 213.85GB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Disk ► INTEL SSDPE2ME1274 SN:FM0624D000R2P/SHN, 1117.81GB Port 21D, BJot - 4T, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 041X0.0 ► INTEL SSDPE2ME1274 SN:FM0624D000R2P/SHN, 1117.81GB Port 21D, BJot - 3T, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 041X0.0 Select to set more Information about the disk ++: Select Screen I: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESDC: Exit

After a NVMe device is selected, press and the following screen will appear. Select Mark as Spare and press to mark the selected device as a spare device.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced INTEL: SSDPE2HE012T4-SN:PHD065410L2IP2HGN, 1117.0108 Disk Actioner: Mark as Date Mark as Journaling Drive Turn Locate LED On Controller: Volume Management Device Controller Model Number: INTEL: SSDPE2HE012T4 Serial Number: PHD065410L2IP2HGN SIZE: 1117.0108 Status: Non-RAD Block Size: 512 Root Port Number: 2 Root Port Offset: 0 Slot Number: 3 Socket Number: 1 VMO Controller Number: 1 PCI Bus:Device.Function: 03:00.0 Horn disk as Space +: Select Screens T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save R Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that you want the selected device to be used as a spare device. The options are Yes and No.

Mortio Setup utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Nagestrends, Inc. Advanced Mark as Spare Are you sure you want to mark the disk as Spare? Marking disk as Spare will remove all date on the disk. Yes No Mark disk as Spare +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Nagestrends, Inc.

Note: A spare disk is used for automatic RAID volume rebuilds when status of failed, missing, or at risk is detected on the array disk. For a RAID0 volume, only status of at risk will trigger automatic RAID volume rebuilds.

To Mark a RAID Volume as a Journaling Drive

Refer to the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access the All Intel VMD Controllers menu. When the following screen appears, select a desired NVMe device from the list of Non-RAID Physical Disks for use as a journaling drive.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers RAID Volume1 ► Volume0, RAIDS(Parity), 2123.04GB, Normal ► Volume1, RAIDS(Parity), 106.18GB, Normal Non-RAID Physical Diskas ► INTEL DEPREZBEDATE ON/OFFORD/DEMOOR/GEN, 1117.01GB For 1:2.0, Unit 57, 8bit, VMD, 80-84.0M.x Select to see more information about the disk ++: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +:-: Change Opt. F1: Universal Help F3: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

After selecting a NVMe device, press and the following screen will appear. Select Mark as Journaling Drive and press .

Auto Setup utility - Copyright IC7 2019 American Meatsrends, Inc. advanced INTEL SSDPE2NED1274 SN:FM06D4500RIP3HGN, 1117.B10B Disk Actions: - Work as Name - Work as Journaling Drive - Turn Sequence LSE On Controller: Volume Management Device Controller Host Number: INTEL SSDPE2NED1274 Serial Number: FM06D4500RIP3HGN Size: 1117.01GB Status: Non-RAD Block Size: 518 Host Port Number: 2 Host Port Offset: 0 Slot Number: G7 Socket Number: 1 AMD Controller Number: 1 PCI Bus:Device.Function: 04:00.0 Mark disk so Journaling Drive +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright iQI 2019 American Meatsrends, Inc.

When the following screen appears, select Yes to confirm that the selected device is to be used as a journaling drive. The options are Yes and No.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Mark as Journaling Drive Are you sure you want to work the disk as Journaling Drive? Marking disk as Journaling Drive all remove all data on the disk. Yes No Mark disk as Journaling Drive +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E80: Exit Version 2.35.17%. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note: RAID Write Hole (RWH) is a condition associated with a power/drive-failure/crash while writing to a RAID5 volume. The use of journaling drive that contains partial parity logging (PPL) can reduce the potential data loss. Refer to the following illustration for the use of journaling drive.

graph TD
    A["Journaling Drive (PPL)"] --> B["Disk1 (Data)"]
    A --> C["Disk2 (Data)"]
    A --> D["Disk3 (Data)"]
    A --> E["Disk4 (Parity)"]
    B --> F["(read) old data XOR operation (write) new data"]
    C --> G["(read) old parity XOR operation (write) new parity"]
    D --> H["(read) old parity XOR operation (write) new parity"]
    I["Store PPL to the journaling drive"] --> A
    J["Partial parity logging (PPL) = old data XOR old parity\nNew parity = new data XOR PPL"] --> A

E.3 Use of Journaling Drive

The following section describes the use of a journaling drive for the RAID5 volume, which is a parity-based RAID.

Step 1. Refer to the instructions stated in the E.1 section to access All Intel VMD Controllers menu items. When the following screen appears, use the arrow keys to select the desired RAID5 volume.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrands, Inc. Advanced All Intel VMD Controllers VMD Volume ► ValueX0, RUIDS(Parity), 2123.R458, Normal ► Volume1, VMDI(Parity) 104.2658 Normal Non-RMID Physical Dikes: ► INTEL BSEPEENES1274 SNLPHODG2ATODOREPOMON, 1117.B108 Fort 2:0, Slot 97, OPUL, VMDI, BDF 04:00.0 Select to see more information about the RAID VOLUME +: Select Screen TI: Select Idea Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt.. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit BDF: Exit Version 2.30.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrands, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: Volume9 RAID Level: RAID5(Parity) Strip Size: 64KB Size: 2123.84GB Status: Normal EnableSize: Yes Block IDs: S12 IME FullOut [Disabut] RAID Member Disks: INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 INICAMOT174008DEPENN, 1117.81SB Port 910, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, EDF 03:00,0 INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SRIFM0624500EFPENN, 1117.81SB Port 310, Slot 3T, CPU, VMD, EDF 04:00,0 INTEL SSDPE2ME01274 SRIFM0624500LZIPHCN, 1117.81SB Port 210, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, EDF 03:00,0 Raid Write Role policy +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Step 2. Use the arrow keys to select RWH Policy. RWH is a scenario related to a power/drive-failure/crash.

RWH Policy

Press and the following screen will appear. If any device has been set as a journaling drive (see pages 175 and 170), the options are Distributed PPL, Journaling Drive, and Disable.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc. advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions ► Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Sign: Size: Status: Bootable: Block Slides RMP Policy: RAID Member Disks: ► INTEL SEDPEZMED1274 SNICVMOD174VDDSPD Port: 0:0, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, BDF 09:00,0 ► INTEL SEDPEZMED1274 SNICVMOD624V00F5P2HGN, 1117.81GB Port: 0:0, Slot 3T, CPU, VMD, BDF 04:00,0 ► INTEL SEDPEZMED1274 SNICVMOD624V00L5P2HGN, 1117.81GB Port: 2:0, Slot 4, CPU, VMD, BDF 03:00,0 RAID Policy: Distributed FPL Journaling Drive Disable RAID Write Help policy +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EODs Exit Version 3.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American News trends, Inc.

If no device has been set as a journaling drive, the options are Distributed PPL and Disable.

RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: VOLUME9 RAID level: PAID(Parity) Strip Size: 64KB Size: 2123.0408 Status: Normal NAM Policy: Distributed PPL Disable RAID Member Disks: INTEL SDFP2CM01274 ONICVM071F4X08D5PHGN, 1117.8108 Port 3:0, 8:lot 4, CPU0, VMD1, BDF 03:00.6 INTEL SDFP2CM01274 ONIFM0624100CIP2PHGN, 1117.8108 Port 3:0, 8:lot 3T, CPU0, VMD1, BDF 04:00.0 INTEL SDFP2CM01274 ONIFM0624100CIP2PHGN, 1117.8108 Port 2:0, 8:lot 4, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 03:00.6 RAID Write Hole policy +: Select Screw TI: Select Item Enter: Select =/-> Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EBC: Exit Version 2.20.1974 Copyright (C) 2019 American Repatrends, Inc.

Note 1: Partial parity logging (PPL) can be defined as the result of XOR calculation of old data and old parity. PPL is a feature available for RAID5 volumes. While a power/drive-failure/crash occurring, PPL information helps rebuild the RAID volume and reduce the potential data loss.

Note 2: For the RWH condition, the Intel® RSTe 5.X or above RWH closure algorithm provides the option of use of an additional NVMe device for RAID volume rebuilds (Journaling Drive RWH closure mode). Without the use of an additional NVMe device, PPL distributed RWH closure mode can be utilized to close the RWH by using the parity drive for example.

Step 3. Set the feature, RWH Policy, to Journaling Drive.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced RAID VOLUME INFO Volume Actions Delete Name: RAID Level: Strip Size: Size: Status: Bootstrap: Block Size: RMM Policy: RAID Member Disks: INTEL: SEPECHEO1274 3N1DVM0717M00BEP2 Port 3:0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 05:00.0 INTEL: SEPECHEO1274 3N1FPM0624000FIP2GHN, 1117.8198 Port 3:0, Slot 3T, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 04:00.0 INTEL: SEPECHEO1274 3N1FPM0624100LIP2GHN, 1117.8198 Port 2:0, Slot 4, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 03:00.0 RAID Policy: Distributed FPL Journalizing Drive Disable RAID Write Note policy +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Press and the RWH JD feature will become available as shown below.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (CI 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced) RAID VOLUME INFO VOLUME ACTIONS ► Delete Name: RAID Level: Stria Size: Size: Status: Bootable: Block Size: New Platform: RAH ID: [INTEL SSDPEZHEOISTA DN:PHODE24500UP26HM, 1117.01GB Port 210 DPU: WD1] ► Change New settings RAID Member Blocks: INTEL SSDPEZHEOISTA4 SH/CWD71740080LP26HM, 1117.01GB Port 310, Slot 4, CPU0, VH02, BOP 03:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZHEOISTA4 SH/PHODE24500UP26HM, 1117.01GB Port 310, Slot 37, CPU0, VH02, BOP 04:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZHEOISTA4 GN:PHODE24100L2IP3HM, 1117.01GB RAID Write Hole policy +: Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

RWH JD

Use the arrow keys to select RWH JD. Press and the following screen will appear. The feature displays the information of journaling drive(s).

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. ADVANCED RAID VOLUME INFO Volume ACTIONS Delete Name: RAID LEVEL: Strip Size: Size: Status: Bootstrap: Block Size: RAM FOUNT: RAM 3D: INTEL SSDPEZMEO12T4 SN:FMDC624200RIP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 2:0 CFU1 VMD1 , 1117.815B Port 2:0 CFU1 VMD1 Change RAM settings RAM monitor Clips: INTEL SSDPEZMEO12T4 SN:CWMT717400BDIP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 3:0, 8:0t 4, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 03:00,0 INTEL SSDPEZMEO12T4 SN:FMDC624200RIP2HGN, 1117.815B Port 3:0, 3:0t 37, CPU0, VMD2, BDF 04:00,0 INTEL SSDPEZMEO12T4 SN:FMDC624100LZIPNGN, 1117.815B +:- Select Screw I1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Step 4. Use the arrow keys and press to select the desired journaling drive from the option list of RWH JD.

Step 5. For the changes to take effect, use the arrow keys to select Change RWH settings and press .

HAID VOLUME INFO Volume ACTIONS Delete Name: VAID Level: Drip Size: Size: Status: Bootable: Block Size: HMM Policy: MMM ID: Volume VAID (Parity): 64KB 2125.84GB Normal Yes S12 [Jourmailing Drive] [INTEL SSDPEZHE01274 SN:PHHD624000H1P2HON , 1117.81GB Port 2s0 CPU1 WMO1] Change PM settings HAID Member Disks: INTEL SSDPEZHE01274 SN:CAM0717A00B0F1P0HN, 1117.81GB Port 3s0, Slot 4, CPU0, VMO2, BF 09:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZHE01274 SN:PHHD624000F1P0HN, 1117.81GB Port 3s0, Slot 37, CPU0, VMO2, BF 04:00.0 INTEL SSDPEZHE01274 SN:PHHD624100L2P0HN, 1117.81GB +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American News Trends, Inc.

Your computer will return to the main screen of All Intel VMD Controllers as shown below.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. All Intel VMD Controllers FAID Volume: Volume0, VDDS(Parity), 2123.0528, Normal Volume1, FAIDS(Parity), 106.1828, Normal Non-FAID Physical Diskst INTEL SCOPZENES1274 SN:PHD6242000RSPZEN, 1117.8158 Port 210, Slot 3T, CPU1, VMD1, BDF 04:00.0 Select to set are Information about the VMD Volume ++, Select Screen I: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Apt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimald Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.30.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Appendix F

Secure Boot Settings

Secure boot is a feature of UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) that ensures boot loaders are digitally signed and validated. The F.1, F.2, and F.3 sections provide instructions on how to enable the secure boot features. The F.4 section states Key Management settings.

F.1 Boot mode select Feature

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Boot tab. Use the arrow keys to select Boot mode select and press . The options are LEGACY, UEFI, and DUAL. Set Boot mode select to UEFI. For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IPM Security BOOT save & Exit Boot Configuration BOOT MODE SELECT LEGACY to EFI support [DOUBLE] [DISABLED] FIXED BOOT ORDER Priorities Boot Option #1 [Hard Disk] Boot Option #2 [IC/DVD] Boot Option #3 [USB Hard Disk] Boot Option #4 [USB GB/VI] Boot Option #5 Boot mode select BOOT Options #6 LEGACY UEFI DUAL Boot Option #7 Boot Options #8 Boot Option #9 Boot Option #10 Boot Option #11 [DEF] USB Hard Disk Boot Option #12 [DEF] USB CD/DVD Boot Option #13 [DEF] USB Key! Boot Option #14 [DEF] USB Floppy Boot Option #15 [DEF] USD Lan Boot Option #16 [DEF] Network:UEFI... Boot Option #17 [DEF] AP:UEFI: Bvl... Select boot mode LEDACV/UEFI +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Entani: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit ► Delete Boot Option Version 2.15.1205. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

F.2 Secure Boot/ Secure Boot Mode/ CSM Support Features

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab as shown below.

Aptio Setup Utility = Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Credit Logs (Del) Security Boot Save & Exit Administrator Password Not Installed User Password Not Installed Password Description If the Administrator's / User's password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is asked for when entering Setup. Please set Administrator's password first in order to set User's password, if clear Administrator's password, the User's password will be cleared as well. The password length must be in the following ranges: Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Administrator Password Password Check Betual Secure Boot Customizable Secure Boot settings +: Select Screen I#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. Fit: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268, Copyright 10) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Use the arrow keys to select Secure Boot and press to access the menu items. The following screen will appear.

Aotio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Hestrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Secure Boot Not Active Vendor Keys Not Active Secure Boot [Disabled] Secure Boot Mode [Custom] COM Support [Enabled] Key Management Secure Boot activated when Platform Key(PK) is onrolling, System mode is User/Deployed, and COM function is disabled +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit version 8.19.1208, Copyright (C) 2017 American Hestrends, Inc.

Secure Boot

This feature is available when the platform key (PK) is pre-registered where the platform operates in the User mode and compatibility support module (CSM) support is disabled in the BIOS Setup utility. Select Enabled for secure boot flow control. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Secure Boot Mode

Use this feature to set the secure boot mode. The options are Standard and Custom. Select Standard to load manufacturer's default secure variables. Select Custom to change the image execution policy and to manage secure boot keys.

CSM Support

Select Enabled to support the legacy CSM, which provides compatibility support for traditional legacy BIOS for system boot. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

F.3 Secure Boot Settings

To have the secure boot support, be sure to follow the steps below (Step 1 \~ Step 4).

Step 1. Set Secure Boot Mode to Standard. Press Yes to install factory default keys as needed.

Anotio Setup Utility = Copyright 103 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. SECURITY Dystem Mode Secure Boot Vendor Keys Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode COS Support Key Management User Not Active Not Active Disassembled Standard Select Boot mode selector: Standard/Custon... In Custom mode Secure Boot Variables can be configured without authentication +: Select Screen 1#: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save H Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1888. Copyright 103.2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Auto Setup Utility = Copyright ICI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Mode Secure Boot Vendor Keys Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode CGM Support Key Management User Not Active Not Active [Disabled] [Custom] [Enabled] Install factory defaults —— Press 'Yes' to install factory default keys Yes No ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit ESG: Exit Version 3.19.1208. Copyright 1Q 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Note: The Key Management menu will become unavailable when Secure Boot Mode is set to Standard.

Step 2. For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Mode Secure Boot Vendor Keys Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode CSH Support Key Management User Not Active Not Active [Disabled] [Standard] [Enabled] Save & Exit Setup Save configuration and exit? Yes No Secure Boot mode selector: Standard/Custom. In Custom mode Secure Boot: Variables can be configured without authentication +: Select Stream T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC4 Exit Version 2.15.1958. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Step 3. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. Set CSM Support to Disabled.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security System Mode User Vendor Keys Active Secure Boot Not Active Secure Boot Disabled Secure Boot Mode [Standard] CDM Support Enabled Key Management CDM Support Disabled Enabled Enable/Disable DSH Support. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F3: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit CSD: Exit Version 2.20.1374. Copyright 4CL 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility.

Step 4. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. Set Secure Boot to Enabled.

AoTIO Setup UTILITY - Copyright (C) 2019 American Netsfrends, Inc. Security System Mode Vendor Keys Secure Boot Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode CSH Support Key Management User Active Not Active [Disabled] [Standard] [Disabled] Secure Boot Disabled Enabled Secure Boot Feature is Active if Secure Boot is Enabled, Platform Key(PK): is enrolled and the System is in user mode. The Node change requires platform reset +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC1 Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netsfrends, Inc.

For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Secure Boot menu. The following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Security Secure Boot Vendor Keys Secure Boot Secure Boot Secure Boot Mode CSH Support Key Management Secure Boot feature is Active if secure boot is Enabled. Platform Key(PK) is enrolled and the System is in user appv. The node change requires platform reset +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 8.30.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note: Once Secure Boot is enabled, CSM Support will become disabled and the legacy environment is no longer valid. The authorized UEFI support such as UEFI OS, AOC UEFI FW, and UEFI PXE server are allowed.

F.4 Key Management Settings

The Key Management menu as shown below, which is available when Secure Boot Mode is set to Custom, allows the secure boot keys to be installed via the external device and be involved in the secure boot process.

Vendor Keys Valid Preparation Factory Defaults Disasised ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot variables ► Enroll Efi Dags Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEPI OI' from DB ► Restore DB defaults

Secure Boot variable | Size | Keys | Key Source ► Platform Key(s) | 1460 | 1 | Factory ► Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 | Factory ► Authorized Signatures | 425 | 3 | Factory ► Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 27 | Factory ► Authorized TimeStamps | 1525 | 1 | Factory ► OsRecovery Signatures | 1460 | 1 | Factory

+/- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Have a Exit ESC: Exit

Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.

Provision Factory Defaults

This feature is to provision the default secure boot keys set by the manufacturer when system is in the Setup mode. The options are Disabled and Enabled.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright 107 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Security Boot variables Enroll Eff Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size Platform key(fx) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 | Factory Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 27 | Factory Authorized TimeStamps | 1563 | 1 | Factory OsRecovery Signatures | 1466 | 1 | Factory Provision Factory Defaults — Disabled Enabled Install factory default. Secure Boot keys after the platform reset and while the System is in setup mode +: Select Screen T4: Select item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit E004 Exit! Version 2.20.17Ms. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Select and press Yes to restore factory default secure boot keys and key variables. Also, it will reset the system to the User mode. The options are Yes and No.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory defaults ID sabied! Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' from DB Restore IB defaults Secure Boot Variable | SLS Platform Key(K) 148 Key Exchange Keys | 156 Authorized Signatures | 405 Forbidden Signatures | 37041 Authorized Timestamps | 1563 GetRecovery Signatures | 14051 Install factory defaults Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +:- Change Opt. F1: Normal Help F3: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

▶Reset To Setup Mode (available when the System Mode is in User mode)

Select and press Yes to clear all secure boot variables and reset the system to the Setup mode. The options are Yes and No.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eff Image Device Guard Anday Remove 'UEFI Do' from 06 Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | SLA Platform Key(TX) | 146 Key Exchange Keys | 156 Authorized Signatures | 406 Forbladen Signatures | 376 Authorized Timestamp | 1561 GetRecovery Signatures | 1461 Reset To Setup Mode Deleting all variations will reset the System to Setup Mode Do you want to proceed? Yes No Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Export Secure Boot variables

Use this feature to export NVRAM content of secure boot variables to files in a root folder on a file system device.

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megastrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ■ Restore Factory Keys ■ Reset To Setup Mode ■ Export Secure Boot Variables ■ Enroll Efi Design Device Guard Ready ■ Remove 'UEF1 OK' from DB ■ Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | C Platform Key(fx) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4554 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized TimeStamps | 1565 DoRecovery Signatures | 1466 File System No Valid File System Available Ok +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version $20.1974. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megastrends, Inc.

▶Enroll Efi Image

This feature is to enroll SHA256 hash of the binary into the Authorized Signature Database (DB) and to allow the image to run in the secure boot mode.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc. Securities Vendor Keys: Valid Provision Factory Defaults (Disabled) ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot Variables ► EnOUI ETI Image Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEFI OK' from OS ► Restore OE defaults Secure Boot Variable | Slag | 0 ► Platform Key(K) | 1466 ► Key Exchange Keys | 1560 ► Authorized Signatures | 4809 ► Forbidden Signatures | 3724 ► Authorized Timestamps | 1565 ► DoRecovery Signatures | 1466 File System No Valid File System Available Ok +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.

▶Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB (available when the system is not in Device Guard Ready)

Select and press Yes to remove Microsoft UEFI CA certificate from the DB. The options are Yes and No.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright 107 2019 American Megstrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Device Guard ready system must not list 'Microsoft UEFI CA' Certificate in Authorized Signature database (db) Provision Factory Defaults IDisabled! Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variables | S12 Platform Key(fx) | 140 Key Exchange Keys | 150 Authorized Signatures | 420 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Timestamps | 1565 | 1 Factory DoRecovery Signatures | 1496 | 1 Factory Remove 'UEFI CA' from DB Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No 4: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit

Select and press Yes to restore the DB variables to factory defaults. The options are Yes and No.

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright 107 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults IDisabled Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEPI ON' from No Restore OR defaults Secure Boot Variable | Sla Platform Key(K) 140 Key Exchange Keys 150 Authorized Signatures 450 Forbidden Signatures 1724 Authorized Timestamps 1565 OSRecovery Signatures 1496 Restore DB defaults - Press 'Yes' to proceed 'No' to cancel Yes No +: Select Screen T4: Select item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Utilized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.20.1874. Copyright 107 2019 American Repetrends, Inc.

*Refer to the following settings for keys and signatures related to secure boot.

▶ Platform Key (PK)

The Platform Key (PK), which is pre-installed in firmware during manufacturing, provides full control of the secure boot key hierarchy. The options are Details, Export, Update, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of PK. Select Export to save the current PKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load PKs from a file on the external device. Select Delete to clear the current PKs and reset the system to the Setup mode. See the following for more information of each option.

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright TC? 2019 American Nagestrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid PROVISION Factory Defaults (Disobied) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Images Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Ke Platform Key(PK) | 1465 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures[ 4263] | 0 | Factory Forbidden Signatures[ 3724] | 71 | Factory Authorized Time stamps[ 1565] | 1 | Factory OsRecovery Signatures[ 1465] | 1 | Factory Platform Key(PK) Details Export Update Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or Load certificates from a file: 1.Public key certificate: wEEFLISTNATURE_LIST wEEFL CERT_XS04 (DER) c)EFTI CERT_BAD048 (bin) d)EEFL CERT_SNHWXX 2.Authenticates UEPI Variable: 3.EPI PE/DOFF Image/DNA550 Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Delinezed Defaults F4: Save it Exit ESC: Exit

Details: Use the arrow keys to select Details and press . It displays detailed information of PK as shown below.

Aotio Setup utility - Copyright TO 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults IP(iesubled) ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot variables ► Enroll Eff Image Device Guard ► Remove 'UEF1 ► Restore DB dns Secure Boot v Platform Key ► Key Exchange Keys | 15601 | 1 Factory ► Authorized Signatures[ 48691 ] 0 | Factory ► Forbidden Signatures[ 37241 ] 77 | Factory ► Authorized TimeStamps[ 15651 ] 1 Factory ► OsRecovery Signatures[ 14661 ] 1 Factory Platform Key(FK) List| Set.Type| Count | Size | Dener WUD | Certificate Legend 11 X.509 | 11 1422 | 250C4851-... | 11 Security Violation +: Select Screen T1: Project Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit

Export: Use the arrow keys to select Export. It is to save the current PKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID(sub)led ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot variables ► Enrollment Image Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEFI OR' from DB ► Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No ► Platform Key(No) ► Key Exchange Keys ► Authorized Signatures[ ] 42631 ► Forbidden Signatures[ ] 37241 ► Authorized Timestamps[ ] 35651 ► OSRecovery Signatures[ ] 14651 Platform Key(PI) Details Export Update Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public key Certificates: aEEFI_SIGNATURE_13ST bEEFI_CERT_XSOP (DEY) cEEFI_CERT_RASOAB (BIN) dEEFI_CERT_SHWXY 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3. EPI PE/DOFF Image(SHASE) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen II: Object Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear.

Ratio Setup utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID(sabled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI ON' Restore OR defaults Secure Boot variable Platform Key(+) Select a File System Key Exchange Keys 1560 1 Factory Authorized Signatures 4263 3 Factory Forbladen Signatures 3724 71 Factory Authorized Timestamps 1565 1 Factory OnRecovery Signatures 1466 1 Factory Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public key Certificate: aDEFI_SIGNATURE_LIST bDEFI_CERT_X809 (DEM) cDEFI_CERT_RBAD04B (BIN) dDEFI.CERT_SHAWX 2.Authenticated UEFA (COFF IMAGE(SIGNES)) Ex: External,Mixed +F: Select Screen T: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E00: Exit

Note: Refer to the right panel of the screen for the file formats accepted.

Update: Use the arrow keys to select Update. It is to load the factory defaults or load PKs from a file on the external device.

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megarends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults ID:load(csd) Restore Factory Keys Restore To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Eff Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Ka Platform Key(%) | 1661 Key Exchange Keys | 15691 Authorized Signatures1 | 42631 Forbidden Signatures1 | 37841 Authorized TimeStamps1 | 15651 DeRecovery Signatures1 | 14651 Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(PL) Details Importing Certificates from a 11:11. Public key certificates: a) EFL SIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL CERT_XS09 (DEF) c) EFL CERT_PSR204B (bin) d) EFL CERT_SHMXX 2. Authenticated EFL Variable: 3. EFL PE/COFF Image(SHA55) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit

Press and the following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Public Key certificate WEFLSIGNATURE LIST WEFLCENT_XS09 (DEN) WEFLCENT_RXAD046 (BIN) WEFLCENT_SHRXX Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from DE Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | 51 Platform Equity | 18 Key Exchange Keys | 15 Authorized Signatures | 43 Forbidden Signatures | 37 Authorized Timestamp | 165 GetRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Update Press 'Yes' to load Factory default 'Pv' or 'No' to load it from a file on external media Authenticated UEFI able F1 PE/COFF Image(SNA256) SOURCE: tory,External,Mixed Yes No Project Screen T1: Project Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Defaulted Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

To load the factory defaults, navigate to Yes and press . The following screen will appear.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright ICF 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Valid Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Images Device Guard Ready Remove 'EFE CR' from OE Restore OE defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Keys | Key Platform Key(%) | 1465 | 1 Fact Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Fact Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 Fact Forbidden Signatures | 924 | 71 Fact Authorized Timestamps | 3595 | 1 Factory OsRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Update Success OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Fabric key Certificate: eEFI SIGNATURE_LIST dEFI_CERT_XSDB (DE) cEFI_CERT_RSADO (bio) dEFI_CERT_SHRXXV 2. Authenticated UEPI Variable: 3. EPI PE/DOFF Image(SHA256) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen 14: Select Info Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save R Exit ESD: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright © 2013 American Negatrends, Inc.

To load PKs from a file on the external device, navigate to No and press .

Aotio Setup Utility - Copyright 1C7 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot Variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'IEFI OR' from No Restore OE defaults Secure Boot Variable | 51 Platform Key(7) Key Exchange Keys | 13 Authorized Signatures | 40 Forbidden Signatures | 39 Authorized Timestamp | 1565 DoRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Modified Disabled Update Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'PN' or 'No' to load it from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key certificate: eIEFI SIGNATURE_LIST bIEFI_CERT_XSOM (DEM) cIEFI_CERT_BR0048 (BIN) dIEFI_CERT_SH0XX Authenticated UEPI File: F1 PE/COFF Image(SHA256) Source: History.External.Mixed Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E00: Exit

When the following screen appears, select the USB flash drive that contains the desired file.

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset to Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OK' from D6 Restore DO defaults Secure Boot variable | Size/ Ka Platform Key(%) | 14661 Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures | 45631 Forbidden Signatures | 97241 Authorized Timestamps | 15651 GoRecovery Signatures | 14651 Select File 

Option Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove UEFI OR from DB Restore to defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Keys Platform type() | 1466 | 1 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Factory Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 Factory Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 27 Factory Authorized TimeDraws | 1565 | 1 Factory OnRecovery Signatures | 1466 | 1 Factory Import File Format Public Key Certificate MUTTER: 10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a files: LPublic Key Certificate: aEPI_SIGNATURE_LIST bEPI_CERT_XSOS (DER) cEPI_CERT_RSDNS (BIN) dEPI_CERT_SHAKX eAuthenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFI PE/COFF Image(DHA56) fKey Source: Factory, External, Mixed. +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit BSC: Exit Version 2.38.1878, Copyright (C) 2019 American Regatrends, Inc.


Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from Do Restore DB defaults Secure Boot Variable | S Platform Key(N) | 3 Key Exchange Keys | 1 Authorized Signatures | 4 Forbidden Signatures | 5 Authorized TimeStamps | 1965 | 1 Factory DoRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Update Confirm update of "Pc" with content from the file Pk Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: I.Public Day Certificates: aEPI_SIGNATURE_LIST bEPI_CERT_XSOS (SEM) cEPI_CERT_RSAQAS (WIN) dEPI_CERT_SHXXX Authenticated UEFI able (F) PE/CDFE Image(SNAC56) source: tory.External,Mixed +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Netto Setup utility - Copyright IC7 2019 American Meastrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults ■ Restore Factory Keys ■ Reset To Setup Mode ■ Export Secure Boot variables ■ Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready ■ Remove 'UIFI DA' from DB ■ Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Keys | Key Platform Key(K) | 1463 | 1 Fact ■ Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 1 Fact ■ Authorized Signatures | 4263 | 3 Fact ■ Forbidden Signatures | 8741 | 77 Fact ■ Authorized Timetrapods | 1565 | 1 Fact ■ Osheccovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Fact Modified ID (selected) Update Success OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: I.Public key Certificate: a) EFL SIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL CERT_XS09 (DER) c) EFL CERT_RISAC045 (bin) d) EFL CERT_SHAWX 2. Authenticated UFI's Variable: 3. Effi PE/COFF Image(DNA25x) Key Source: Factory, External,Mixed +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Several Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit! ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2013 American Megarends, Inc.

Delete: Use the arrow keys to select Delete and press to clear the current PKs and reset the system to the Setup mode. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [0/10/10/10] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OK' from OD Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No Platform Key(No) Key Exchange Keys | 15601 Authorized Signatures | 42693 Forbidden Signatures | 37241 Authorized Timestamps | 15651 OsRecovery Signatures | 14667 Platform Key(No) Details Export Update Delete Platform Key(No) Details Export Update Delete Eiff. LIONATURE_LIST eEFI_CERT_XS09 (DER) eEFI_CERT_BREAD040 (BIN) eEFI_CERT_SHAWX 2 Authenticated UEFI Variable 3_EFI PC/CFF (Image(SHAES)) KEY SOURCE: Factory:External,Mixed +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-1 Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (E) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.


Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults ID=DISABLED Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'EEFI CM' from D Restore OD defaults Secure Boot variable | S Platform KeyPin Key Exchange Keys | 1 Authorized Signatures | 1 Forbloden Signatures | 37 Authorized TimeStamps | 1563 | 1 Factory OsRecovery Signatures | 1465 | 1 Factory Delete Security key/Databasee WARNING: Removing 'FK' will reset the System to Setup/Audit Mode OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public key certificate: a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST a)EFL CERT_XS0A (DB) c)EFL CERT_BREAD48 (bin) d)EFL CERT_SHAWX Authenticated UEFI File F1 PE/DIFF Image(CHWES) Source: Binary.External.HMixed +=: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit EICI Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

▶Key Exchange Key

The Key Exchange Key (KEK), which is held by the operating system vendor, can be updated by the holder of the PK and be used by secure boot to protect access to signatures databases. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of KEKs. Select Export to save the current KEKs to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load KEKs from a file on the external device. Select Append to load the factory defaults or load KEKs from a file on the external device. Select Delete to clear the current KEKs or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 191 for the Export process. Refer to pages 192, 193, 194, and 195 for the Update process.) 

ATIO Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegstrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults (Dimabled) Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Security Boot Variable Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'EFI CA' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Pa Platform Key(N) | 1468 Key Exchange Keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4263 Forbidden. Signatures | 3264 Authorized TimeStamps | 1563 OSRecovery Signatures | 1465 Key Exchange Keys Details Export Update Append Delete 71 Factory 1 Factory 1 Factory Entry: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESG: Exit Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a *File: 1.Public Key Certificate; a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST b)EFI_CERT_X509 (DEF) c)EFI_CERT_EFA04B (win) d)EFI_CERT_SHXXX 2.Authenticated EFI Variable: 3.EFI PERCOFF Inside(SH256) Key Sources: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESG: Exit

Append: Use the arrow keys to select Append. 

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI DR' from DB Restore DB defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | Ka Platform Key(N): 14661 Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures: 45391 Forbloden Signatures: 37241 Authorized Timestamp: 15851 OscDiscovery Signatures: 14661 Modified [Disabled] Key Exchange Keys Details Export Update Append Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: Public Key Certificate: a)EPILSIGNATURELIST DEPI_CERT_XSOS (DEM) DEPI CERT_XSOSDB (BIN) DEPI CERT_XPROOD 2.-Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFI PC/OFF Image(SHA/SG) Key Source: Factory, External,Mixed 71 Factory 1 Factory 1 Factory +1 Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select. +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit E6CH EXIT

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Key Modified Provision Factory Defaults IDisabled Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'IEFI OR' from O Restore ID defaults Secure Boot variable | 1 Platforms Key(Th) Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures Forbidden Signatures Authorized Timestamps 156 Osbcovery Signatures 14661 Append Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'KEK' or 'No' to load IT from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key certificate: a)IEFLSDVATURE_LIST b)IEFLCERT_X809 (DEM) c)IEFLCERT_BSADN8 (BIN) d)IEFLCERT_SHWXX Authenticated UEFI able F1: PE/COFF Image(SHA25) Source: tary.External,Mixed Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F5: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

To load the factory defaults, navigate to Yes and press . The following screen will appear. 

Atoio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Reset to Setup Mode Encoll Efi Image Save all Secure Boot variables Secure Boot variable | Size | KeySWI Key Source Platform Key(H) 1466 | 11 Default Key Exchange Keys | 1560 | 11 Default Authorized Signatures | 4289 | 91 Def Forbidden Signatures | 3724 | 771 Def Authorized TimeStamp | 1565 | 11 Def Oscocvery Signatures | 1466 | 11 Def Append Success OK Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key Certificate in: a)EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b)EPI_CERT_XSOS (DER encoded) c)EPI_CERT_BREAD4B (Din) d)EPI_LEKT_SHAS6_304_5t2 e)Authenticated HEFI Variable 3.EPI PE/COPF Image(SHA256) Key Source: Default,External,Mixed,Test +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt: P1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit ECC: Exit version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

To load KEKs from a file on the external device, navigate to No and press . Refer to pages 194 and 195 on how to load KEKs from a file on the external device. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [0] [0] [0] Restore Factory Keys Result to Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Effi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from Do Restore OS defaults Secure Boot variable | S Platform Key(s) Key Exchange Keys | 1 Authorized Signature(1) Forbidden Signature(1) Authorized Timestamp(1) OsRecovery Signature(1) [0] 11 Factory Append Press 'Yes' to load factory default 'KEK' or 'No' to load IT from a file on external media Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public Key Certificate: a) EFLLSIGNATURE_LIST b) EFL CERT_XSOS (DER) c) EFT CERT_EPAOBO (bin) d) EFL CERT_SHAKXX Authenticated UEFI able: FI PE/DOFF Image(SHAUSE) Sources: tory.External,Mixed Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Datalized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESO: Exit Version 2.30.3874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Delete: Use the arrow keys to select Delete and press . Navigate to Yes and press to clear the current KEKs. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hesatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot Variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'UEFI OR' from DE Aestone to defaults Secure Boot Variable | Size | Ka Platform Key(Th) | 1465 Key Exchange Keys | 3200 Authorized Signatures | 4263 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Time stamp | 1565 Osheccovery Signatures | 1465 Key Exchange Keys Details Export Update Append Delete 71 Factory 1 Factory 1 Factory Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1. Public Key Certificate a) EFI_S(ONATURE_LIST) b) EFI_CENT_XSOS (DBK) c) EFI_CERT_EPA0048 (BIN) d) EFI_CENT_SHAWXX 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3. EFI PE/COFF Image(DNA256) Key Sources: Factory, External,Mixed +:- Select Screen I: Select Item Enter: Select +:- Change Opt: F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit EGI: Exit


Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Modified Provision Factory Defaults [Disabled] Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Damage Device Guard Ready Remove 'LEFT OR' from DE Restore On defaults Secure Boot Variable | S Platform Key(D) Key Exchange Keys Authorized Signatures Forbidden Signatures Authorized Timestamps | 36 OscDiscovery Signatures | 1461 1 Factory Delete Security Key/Database Press 'Yes' to delete the variable, or 'No' to delete only a certificate from the key database Yes No Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Public key Certificate: a)EFLSIGNATURE_LIST b)EFL CERT_XSOS (DER) c)EFL CERT_BREAD08 (BIN) d)EFL CERT_SHAWXY Authenticated UEFI able: FI PE/IOFF Image(###56) Source: tory.external,Mixed Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values FS: Optimized Defaults F3: Save A Exit ESC: Exit

Navigate to No and press to delete only one certificate from the key database. 

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc. security Vendor keys Modified Enroll Factory defaults on load certificates from a file: Provision Factory Defaults DIsabled 1: Public Key Certificates aEPI_SIGNATURE LIST bEPI_COUNT_XSUI (DBM) cEPI_COUNT_REABOGS (bind) dEPI_COUNT_SEVEX Device Remove Restore Select a Signature List to be removed from a key database List: Six, PageCount | Size | owner QUID | Certificate Legend X.508 | 1 | 1516 | T7FMS-BD-... | Microsoft Corporation KEK CR 2011 Key Exchange Keys 1501 | 1 Factory Authorized Signatures 4263 | 3 Factory Forbidden Signatures 3924 | 71 Factory Authorized Timestamps 1565 | 1 Factory OSRecovery Signatures 1456 | 1 Factory +: Select screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. C1: General Help P2: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save & Exit CFG: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Hegatrends, Inc.

▶ Authorized Signatures

Authorized Signature Database (DB) contains authorized signing certificates and digital signatures. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of Authorized Signatures. Select Export to save the current DB to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DB from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DB. Select Delete to clear the current DB or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 191 for the Export process. Refer to pages 192, 193, 194, and 195 for the Update process. Refer to pages 196 and 197 for the Append process. Refer to page 198 for the Delete process.) 

Autio Setup Utility - Copyright IC7 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults ► Restore Factory Keys ► Reset To Setup Mode ► Export Secure Boot variables ► Encoll Efi Image Device Guard Ready ► Remove 'UEFI OR' from DB ► Restore OR defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No ► Platform Key(FX) | 1465 ► Key Exchange Keys | 15601 ► Authorized Signatures | 43691 ► Forbidden Signatures | 37241 ► Authorized Timestamps | 15651 ► OnRecovery Signatures | 14651 Modified [Unsibled] Authorized Signatures Details Export Update Append Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a files: LPublic Key Certificate: wEPI_SIGNATURE_LIST wEPI_CERT_XSDY (DEPA) cEIFT_COERT_RSDQ45 (bin) dEIF_CNT_SHARXX 2. Authenticated UEPI Variable: 3.EPI PE/GPF IMAGE(INVASS) Key Source: Factory,External,Mind +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Same A Exit ESC: Exit

▶Forbidden Signatures

Forbidden Signature Database (DBX), which is the inverse of DB, contains forbidden certificates and digital signatures. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of Forbidden Signatures. Select Export to save the current DBX to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBX from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBX. Select Delete to clear the current DBX or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 191 for the Export process. Refer to pages 192, 193, 194, and 195 for the Update process. Refer to pages 196 and 197 for the Append process. Refer to page 198 for the Delete process.) 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright 1C7 2019 American MegaTrends, Inc. Security Vendor Keys Provision Factory Defaults Restore Factory Keys Reset To Setup Mode Export Secure Boot variables Enroll Efi Image Device Guard Ready Remove 'USFI OR' from OE Restore UE defaults Secure Boot variable | Size | No Platform key(fx) | 1465 Key Exchange keys | 1560 Authorized Signatures | 4863 Forbidden Signatures | 5241 Authorized Timestamps | 1565 OnRecovery Signatures | 1465 Modified [Unsibled] Forbidden Signatures Details Export Update Append Delete Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: LPublic Key Certificate: a)EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b)EPI_CERT_XSOS (DEP) c)EPI_CERT_RSQ(40) (blu) d)EPI_CERT_SRAXX 2. Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EPI PE/CFF Image(DWASSE) Key Source: Factory,External,Mixed +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit

▶ Authorized TimeStamps

Authorized Timestamp Database (DBT) is used to issue and check signed time stamp certificates. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of Authorized Timestamps. Select Export to save the current DBT to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBT from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBT. Select Delete to clear the current DBT or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 191 for the Export process. Refer to pages 192, 193, 194, and 195 for the Update process. Refer to pages 196 and 197 for the Append process. Refer to page 198 for the Delete process.) 

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megstrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults Disabled Reset to Setup Mode Encoll Eff Image Save all Secure Boot Variables Secure Boot Variable | Size | Key/Key | Key Source Platform key(%) | 1456 Key Exchange keys | 1580 Authorized Signatures | 4099 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized Timington | 1556 OSRecovery Signatures | 1456 Key Management Save to File Set Now Append Erase Enroll Factory Defaults or load certificates from a file: 1.Plicit Key Certificate in: a?EF1_SIGNATURE_LIST b?EF1_CERT_XS69 (GEN encoded) c?EF1_CERT_RSA2048 (bin) d?EF1_CERT_SHR264,394.512 2.Authenticated UEFI Variable: 3.EFI PE/CFF Image(SHASE) Key Source: Default,External,Mixed,Test +: Select Screen T4: Select item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit version 2.18.1956. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megstrends, Inc.

▶OsRecovery Signatures

OsRecovery Signatures Database (DBR) contains secure boot authorized recovery variables. The options are Details, Export, Update, Append, and Delete. Select Details to display detailed information of OsRecovery Signatures. Select Export to save the current DBR to a FAT formatted USB flash drive. Select Update to load the factory defaults or load DBR from a file on the external device. Select Append to add variables to the existing DBR. Select Delete to clear the current DBR or to delete only one certificate from the key database. (Refer to page 191 for the Export process. Refer to pages 192, 193, 194, and 195 for the Update process. Refer to pages 196 and 197 for the Append process. Refer to page 198 for the Delete process.) 

Audio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Security Provision Factory Defaults IDisabled! Reset to Setup Mode Enroll Eff Image Save all Secure Boot Variables Secure Boot Variable | Size | Key/Key | Key Source Platform key(An) | 1466 Key Exchange Keys | 1500 Authorized Signatures | 4269 Forbidden Signatures | 3724 Authorized TimeStakes | 1565 OSRecovery Signatures | 1488 Key Management Save to File Set New Append Erase Enroll Factory Defaults or Load certificates from a file: 1.Public key certificate In: a:EPI_SIGNATURE_LIST b:EPI_COUNT_XS0A (DDR encoded) c:EPI_COUNT_RSAD040 (bin) d:EPI_COUNT_SPAS26,384,512 2.Authenticated EPI Variable 3.EPI PE/COPF Change/SIMN256 Key Source: Default,External,Mixed.Test +: Select Screen T4: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Appendix G

Configuring iSCSI Settings

Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) is a protocol that defines how block-level data transports between the iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target over an Internet protocol (IP) network. The iSCSI initiator (client/host) enables a connection to the iSCSI target and initiates I/O requests. The iSCSI target can be a group of storage devices or an intermediate device attached to storage devices. The iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target must connect to an IP network. To have iSCSI settings available, refer to instructions stated in the G.1 section. The G.2 section explains iSCSI settings.

G.1 PCIe/PCI/PnP Features

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration and press to access the menu items. 

Auto Setup UTILITY - Copyright 107 2017 American Hesstrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs DPM Security Boot save & Exit ▶ Boot Feature ▶ CPU Configuration ▶ Chipset Configuration ▶ Server HC Configuration ▶ PDH SRATH Configuration ▶ PDH SRATH Configuration ▶ PCDE-PCIDE-PCF Configuration ▶ Super ID Configuration ▶ Serial Port Console Redirection ▶ ADPI Settings ▶ Trusted Computing ▶ ESCB3 Configuration ▶ Intel(KE) Virtual MOLD on CPU PCI, PCI-X and PCI Express Settings. +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Entom: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC4 Exit! Version 8.19.1968 Copyright 107 2017 American Hesstrends, Inc.

 Note: Be sure to have configuration information for the iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target before starting iSCSI settings.

Onboard LAN1 Option ROM

Use the arrow keys to select Onboard LAN1 Option ROM and press . The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI. Set this feature to EFI. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Newstrends, Inc. Advanced PCI Bus Driver Version 05.01.12 PCI Devices Common Settings Above 4G Decoding [Enabled] SR-DTV Support [Disabled] MMIO High Base [Soft] MMIO High Granularity Size [ST66] PCI PERK/PERN Support [Enabled] Maximum Read Request [Auto] MMIO Base [CS] AMME Firmware Source VMA Priority PCIH SLOTS1 PCI-E 3.0 X4 (IN X8) CPU SLOTS2 PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPMON CPU SLOTS3 PCI-E 3.0 X9 OPMON CPU SLOTS4 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPMON CPU SLOTS6 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPMON R.2 PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPMON Onboard LAN1 Option ROM [Legacy] Onboard LAN2 Option ROM [Legacy] Onboard V/day Option ROM [Legacy] Network Stack Configuration Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Disabled Legacy EFI +: Select Screens T4: Select Tree Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESDS: Exit Version 2.19.1988. Copyright (C) 2017 American Newstrends, Inc.

Note: If Onboard LAN1 Option ROM is set to EFI, all features for onboard LAN option ROM will be set to EFI by the EFI driver. Additionally, these features will become unavailable except Onboard LAN1 Option ROM.

Network Stack Configuration

Use the arrow keys to select Network Stack Configuration and press to access the menu items. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American News trends, Inc. advanced PCI Bus Driver Version AS.01.12 PCI Devices Common Settings: Above 4G Dccosing [Enabled] SR-3DV Support [Disabled] MMIO High Base [Set] MMIO High Granularity Size [2560] PCI PERR/GERM Support [Disabled] Maximum Read Request [Auto] MMO2 Base [CS] NAME Firmware Source [AMI Native Support] VGA Priority [Onboard] PCI SLOTS1 PCI-E 3.0 X4 (IN X8) OPRDM [Legacy] CPU SLOTS2 PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRDM [Legacy] CPU SLOTS3 PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRDM [Legacy] CPU SLOTS4 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRDM [Legacy] CPU SLOTS5 PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRDM [Legacy] H.2 PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPRDM [Legacy] Onboard LAN Device [Enabled] Onboard LAN1 Option ROM [EF1] Onboard Video Option ROM [Legacy] Network Stock Configuration Network Stack Settings +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.19.1908. Copyright (C) 2017 American News trends, Inc.

Ipv4 PXE Support/Ipv6 PXE Support

To enable lpv4/lpv6 PXE boot support, use the arrow keys to select and set lpv4 PXE Support/Ipv6 PXE Support to Enabled. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced Network Stack (Enabled) IPv4 FXE Support (Enabled) IPv4 HTTP Support (Disabled) IPv6 FXE Support (Enabled) IPv6 HTTP Support (Disabled) FXE boot visit time 0 Media detect count 1 Enable IPv4 FXE Boot Support. If disabled IPv4 FXE boot option will not be created +: Select Screen T4: Reject Idea Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESQ: Exit Version 2.19.1208. Copyright: HCI 2017 American Newsrends, Inc.

Note: Enable both lpv4 PXE Support and lpv6 PXE Support to have iSCSI settings available. In some cases, enabling either one feature may also have iSCSI settings available depending on the configuration of iSCSI initiator and iSCSI target. For the changes to take effect, save settings and restart the system. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. When the BIOS main screen appears, navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select iSCSI Configuration and press to access the menu items. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American MegaTrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss IP3 Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Chipset Configuration Server MT Configuration PCB SATH Configuration PCB sDATA Configuration PCIe/PCIe/FoP Configuration Super ID Configuration Serial Port Console Redirection ACPI Settings Trusted Computing Boot Configuration Intel(R) Virtual RAID on CPU Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 for 108BASE-T - AC:IF:68s... Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 for 108BASE-T - AC:IF:68s... Configure the ICSI parameters. +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save R Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1908. Copyright (C) 2017 American MegaTrends, Inc.

G.2 Configuring iSCSI Settings

iSCSI Initiator Name

Use this feature to enter the unique initiator name in iSCSI qualified name (IQN) format. 

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright ICJ 2019 American Meastrnds, Inc. Advanced ICSI Initiator Name Iqn.kid.ocl.lscsl_ Add an Attempt Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Delete Attempts Change Attempt Order ICSI Initiator Name Iqn.kid.ocl.lscsl_ The worldwide unique name of ICSI Initiator, Only Iqn format is accepted. Range is from 4 to 200 +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Original Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Add an Attempt

Use the arrow keys to select Add an Attempt. 

Initio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCCS Initiator Name + Add an Attempt - Attempt 1 - Attempt 2 - Delete Attempts - Change Attempt Order Add an Attempt +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to select the desired media access control address (MAC address), network interface card (NIC) port. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc. advanced ▶ MAC AC:1F:SUB:80:100:25 ▶ MAC AC:1F:SUB:80:100:27 FFA: Bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func 0 +: Select Screen 14: Deject Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Audio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced ISCOST Attempt Name ISCOST Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OKI-format ISO Configure EBIT Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 0 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3250 0 [None] The human name defined for this attempt. Maximum length is up to 12 characters +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter! Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.26.1978. Copyright ICI 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

iSCSI Attempt Name

This feature displays the iSCSI attempt name. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced BSCSI Attempt Note BSCSI Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OUT-format ISO Configure ISO Enable DHCP* Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LIN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 3 [Disabled] [Shift] 0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 S250 0 [None] The human row defined for this attempt. Maximum length is auto ID characters +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESD: Exit

iSCSI Mode

Use this feature to set the iSCSI mode. The options are Disabled, Enabled, and Enabled for MPIO. Multipath I/O (MPIO) is a feature that allows the system to route I/O through the available paths if the active path fails (be sure to have more than one physical path connected to the system). 

Anio Setup Utility - Copyright © 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCDI Attempt Name Attempt 1 ISCDI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IPV4] Connection Entry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 OUT-format ISID 2CIF6880006 Configure ISID IsCDI Mode Disabled Enabled Enabled for HP10 Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port 5250 Dout LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Disabled, Enabled, Enabled for HP10 +: Select Screen 11: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274, Copyright © 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

 Note: Enabling the feature, iSCSI Mode, is required for iSCSI configuration.

Internet Protocol

Use this feature to set the Internet protocol. The options are IPv4, IPv6, and Autoconfigure. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Netatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name ISCST Mode Internet Protocol Connection Entry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OUTFormat SSD Configure SSD Enable DHCP* Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Port Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 1 [OSAT]D [OSAT] [OSAT] 0 1000 2015880006 Internet Protocol IPv4 IPv6 Autoconfigure Initiator IP address is system assigned in IPv node. In Autoconfigure mode, ICSST driver will attempt to connect ICSST target via IPv4 stack. If failed then attempt IPv6 stack. +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit

Connection Retry Count

The valid range is 0\~16. Use this feature to enter the number of logon sessions allowed for the iSCSI initiator to restart with the iSCSI target if the first logon connection fails. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC7 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name ISCST Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Oil-format ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Ethernet Port Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Dual LAN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 1 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3250 0 Done! The minimum value is 0 and the maximum is 16.0 means no retry. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit

Connection Establishing Timeout

Use this feature to set the logon connection establishing timeout (in milliseconds). The valid range is from 100 milliseconds to 20 seconds. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright ICF 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name ISCST Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OUI-format ISO Configure ISO Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 1 [Disabled] [IPV4] 0 1000 2CIF58800026 8M0026 [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3250 0 (None) The timeout value in milliseconds, The minimum value is 100 milliseconds and the maximum is 20 seconds. +: Select Screen F4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

OUI-format ISID

This feature displays the default ISID in OUI format. The value (in six bytes) is derived from the MAC address of the NIC port that you selected earlier. 

Aio10 Setup Utility - Copyright 1C7 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name Attempt 1 ISCST Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IPv4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Estabilizing Timeout 1000 OUT-market SSD SCF60000026 LORFIGURE 0010 84426 Enable DHCP [Disabled] Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0 Initiator Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target Address Target Port szz50 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes The timeout value in milliseconds, the minimum value is 100 milliseconds and the maximum is 20 seconds. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Apt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimal Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 3.20.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Configure ISID

Press to configure the ISID. The default value is derived from the last three bytes of the OUI-format ISID. Also, only the last three bytes of the ISID are configurable. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCST Attempt Name ISCST Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OUT-format ISO Configure ISO Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 1 [Disabled] [IPV6] 0 1000 Configure ISO 850026_ 0.0.0.0 OUT-format ISO in 6 bytes; default value are derived from MAC address, Only last 3 bytes are configurable. Example: Update Omecodeeff to oABRCCF07501 by Input F07501. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E804 Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Enable DHCP

Use this feature to disable/enable dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server service for the iSCSI initiator. The options are Disabled and Enabled. 

Motio Setup Utility - Copyright ICP 2019 American Netstrends, Inc. Advanced MSCI1 Attempt Name MSCI1 Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout OUTFormat ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Subset Mask Gateway Target Name Target Address Target Port Root LAN Authentication Type Save Changes Attempt 5 ID:1000180 IP:V41 0 1000 2019/08/2006 Enable DHCP Disabled Enabled 0.0.0.0 +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESE: Exit Version 2.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Netstrends, Inc.

 Note: Set the feature, Enable DHCP, to Disabled if you would like to specify the iSCSI initiator IP address/subnet mask/gateway.

Initiator IP Address (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator IP address. 

Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCIDI Attempt Name 1 ISCIDI Mode [0:50:10] Internet Protocol [74] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Oil-format USD SCIF6009802E Configure USD COMOR Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0_ Initiator Ethernet Mask Gateway 0.0.0.0 Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3250 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-decimal notation. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimal Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.2008. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Initiator Subnet Mask (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator subnet mask. 

Audio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Mesatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCOI Attempt Name ISCOI Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Oil-format ISID Configure ISID Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address Initiator Outlet Mask Gateway Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot LIN Authentication Type Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-decimal notation. Initiator Outlet Mask 0.0.0.8 0.0.0.9 0.0.0.9 3250 0 +: Select Screen T4: Object Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Have B Exit ESD: Exit

Gateway (available when Enable DHCP is set to Disabled)

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI initiator gateway. 

Abitio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced BSCSI Attempt Name 1 BSCSI Mode 100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Internet Protocol (174) Connection Entry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1666 OUT-Format IBD 2CIF56W98DCE Configure IBD CP8DCE Enable DHCP Initiator IP Address - Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway 0.6.6.6.6 Target Name Target IP Address 0.6.6.6.6 Target Port 3250 Boot LIM 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Enter IP address in dotted-decimal notation. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults +/-: Save & Exit ESDI Exit Version 2.13.1268. Copyright 1C1 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Get target info via DHCP (available when Enable DHCP is set to Enabled)

Use this feature to disable/enable dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server service for the iSCSI target. The options are Disabled and Enabled. 

Rotio Setup Utility - Copyright © 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Advanced MSCI Attempt Name 1 MSCI Mode IP(98)(92) Internet Protocol [34] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Tinesuit 1000 Configure BIOS Get target Info via DHCP Enable DHCP Disabled Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name: Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Fort 3250 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Get target info via DHCP Enable ++: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Spt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19-1988, Copyright © 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

 Note 1: Set the feature, Get target info via DHCP, to Disabled if you would like to specify the iSCSI target name/IP address/boot LUN. Note 2: LUN stands for logical unit number, which is used to identify a logical/physical disk.

Target Name

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI target name in IQN format. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Advanced BSCS1 Attempt Name BSCS1 Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Do En In Target Name Target Info Via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot Link Authentication Type Save Changes The worldwide unique name of the target. Only iqn. format is accepted. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit BSCs1 Exit

Target Address

Use this feature to enter the desired iSCSI target IP address. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. advanced MSCI Attempt Name Attempt 1 MSCI Mode (Disabled) Internet Protocol [IPV4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 OUTFormat ISO 20158800006 Target Address- Get target info via ONC (Unsatisfied) Target name Target Address Target Port 3260 Boot LIN 0 Authentication Type [More] Enter Target address in IPV4, IPV6 or URL Format. You Need to configure DNS. server address in advance If input a URL string. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults +/-: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1876. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Target Port

This feature displays the iSCSI target port. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Hexpatrends, Inc. Advanced iSCSI Attempt Name 1 iSCSI Mode [Disabled] Internet Protocol [74] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure IHD CHODE Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP : 0.0.0.0 Get target info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port S230 Boot LUN 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Target Port ++: Select Screen I1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1988. Copyright (C) 2017 American Hexpatrends, Inc.

Boot LUN

Use this feature to enter the LUN ID of boot LUN. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Hapatrends, Inc. Advanced iSCSI Attempt Name ISCSI Mode Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Configure IDID Enable DHCP Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Set target info via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port BOOT LIN Authentication Type Save Changes 1 [Disabled] [IP4] 0 BOOT LIN [Disabled] 0.0.0.0 3250 0 [None] Hexadecimal representation of the LU number. Examples are: 4752-984F-6876-2639, 6784-9-1567-127, 4186-9 ++: Select Screen I1: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit CSC: Exit Version 3.19.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Hapatrends, Inc.

Authentication Type

Use this feature to set the authentication method. The options are CHAP and None. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCOI Attempt Name 1 ISCOI Mode ID(enabled) Internet Protocol [CP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISO Authentication Type Enable DHCP DNAP Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 None Get target info via DHCP ID(enabled) Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 5250 Boot Lim 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes Authentication method: DHAP, Kerberos, or None +: Select Screen T1: Reject Area Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

 Note: Challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) is a protocol used to verify the identity of the peer of a connection.

CHAP Type (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to set the CHAP type. The options are One way and Mutual. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Meatsrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID CN90CE Enable DHCP [Disabled] Initiator TP: 0.0.0.0 Set target info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHAP Type [Mutual] CHAP Name CHAP Secret Reverse CHAP Name Reverse CHAP Secret Save Changes ► Back to Previous Pass None, One way DHCP or Mutual DHCP CHAP Type One way Mutual +F: Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B Exit E90: Exit Version 2.19.1908. Copyright (C) 2017 American Meatsrends, Inc.

 Note 1: If one way (unidirectional) CHAP authentication is performed, the iSCSI target authenticates the iSCSI initiator. Note 2: If mutual (bidirectional) CHAP authentication is performed, the iSCSI target and iSCSI initiator authenticate each other.

CHAP Name (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP name authenticated by the iSCSI target. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Mesatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID CNROCE Enable DHCP (Enabled) Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target Info Via DHCP (Disabled) Target Name CNRP Name Aut CHRP Type [One way] CHAP Rate CHAP Secret Save Charges ► Back to Previous Page DHAP Name +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General, Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit Version 3.19.1988. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

CHAP Secret (available when Authentication Type is set to CHAP)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP secret (12\~16 characters) authenticated by the iSCSI target. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. advanced Configure ISOID Enable DHCP Initiator IP : 0.0.0.0 Get target Info via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHAP Type CHAP Name CHAP Secret Save Changes Back to Previous Page One way Create New CHAP Secret The minimum length is 12 bytes and the minimum length is 15 bytes. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit DHCE: Exit Version 3.19.1908. Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

CHAP Status

This feature displays the CHAP status. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrnds, Inc. Advanced OU-Format ISID DCIF68800026 Configure ISID 800026 Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP Address 0.0.0.0 Initiator Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Delivery 0.0.0.0 Get target Info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target Address Target Port 3250 Boot LUN 0 Authentication Type [CHMP] CHMP Type [Mutual] CHMP Name CHMP Status [Not Installed] Reverse CHMP NAME Reverse CHMP Secret Reverse CHMP Status [Not Installed] Save Changes Back to Previous Page The minimum length is 12 bytes and the minimum length is 15 bytes. +: Select Screw T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESQ: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Newstrnds, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Name (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP name authenticated by the iSCSI initiator. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Configure ISID CN802E Enable DHCP (Enabled) Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Set target info via DHCP (Disabled) Target Name: Reverse DHCP Name - Auth CHAP Type [Mutual] CHAP Name CHAP Secret Reverse DHCP Name Reverse DHCP Secret +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit GSD: Exit Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page Version 2.19.1208. Copyright 4C1 2017 American Negatrends, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Secret (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

Use this feature to enter the CHAP secret (12\~16 characters) authenticated by the iSCSI initiator. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Meastrends, Inc. advanced Configure ISID 09602E Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP : 0.0.0.0 Get target Info Via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHRP Type [Mutus] CHRP Name CHRP Secret Reverse CHRP Name Reverse CHRP Secret Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page The minimum length is 12 bytes and the minimum length is 15 bytes. +:- Select Screen F1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: Reversal Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1868, Copyright (C) 2017 American Hegetrends, Inc.

Reverse CHAP Status (available when CHAP Type is set to Mutual)

This feature displays the reverse CHAP status. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced CPU-format: I2D Configure: I2D Enable DHCP Initiator IP address Initiator Subnet Mask Gateway Set target info via DHCP Target Name Target Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type CHAP Type CHAP Status Reverse CHAP Name Reverse CHAP Secret Reverse CHAP Status Save Changes ► Back to Previous Page The unique length is 12 bytes and the maximum length is 16 bytes. +:- Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit GSC: Exit Version 2.20.1974. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Save Changes

Use the arrow keys to select Save Changes and press to save settings shown on the screen. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Nagestrends, Inc. advanced BSCS: None Internet Protocol Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Configure BXP Enable DHCP Initiator IP : 0.0.0.0 Get target info via DHCP Target Name Target IP Address Target Port Boot LUN Authentication Type Save Changes Back to Previous Page [Disabled] [IP4] 0 0.0.0.0 [250] 0 [None] Must reboot system manually for changes to take place. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit EOPs Exit

 Note: For the changes to take effect, save settings and restart the system.

Back to Previous Page

Use the arrow keys to select Back to Previous Page and press . 

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright IC? 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced ISCUI Name [Disabled] Internet Protocol [IP4] Connection Retry Count 0 Connection Establishing Timeout 1000 Configure ISID 09500E Enable DHCP [Enabled] Initiator IP: 0.0.0.0 Get target info via DHCP [Disabled] Target Name Target IP Address 0.0.0.0 Target Port 3260 Boot LM 0 Authentication Type [None] Save Changes BACK to Previous Page Back to Previous Page ++, Select Screen I4: Select, Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ISCU Exit Version 3.19.1288. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

The user will be returned to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration as shown below. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. Advanced I2051 Initiator Name Add an Attempt Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Delete Attempts Change Attempt Order The worldwide unique name of I2051 Initiator. Only IOM format is accepted. Name is from 4 to 2051 +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit E00: Exit Version 2.30.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Delete Attempts

Use the arrow keys to select Delete Attempts. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced IECSI Initiator Name Iqn.kid.meci.iscxi ► add an Attempt ► Attempt 1 ► Attempt 2 ► Delete Attempts ► Change Attempt Order Delete one or more attempts +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Precious Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit E800: Exit Version 2.20.1774. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Auto Setup utility - Copyright ICF 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Consult Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit [Disabled] [Disabled] HAG: AC-IF:68-B0-00-06, P#A: Bus i | Dev a | Func o, iOSI mode: Enabled, IP version: IPv4 +: Select Stream 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save A Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.50.1276, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Attempt 1

Use the feature to disable/enable Attempt 1. The options are Disabled and Enabled. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc. Advanced Refent 1 Attempt 2 Ownit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Disabled [Disabled] Attempt 1 Disabled Enabled MAC: AC1F:68:BD:00:26, PPA: Bus 1 | Dev.0 | Func 0, 100SI (Mode enabled), JP version: IPv4 +: Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.30.1276, Copyright ICI 2019 American NewsTrends, Inc.

Attempt 2

Use the feature to disable/enable Attempt 2. The options are Disabled and Enabled. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Attempt 1 [Disabled] Attempt 2 [Disabled] Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Attempt 3 Disabled Enabled AMD: AC-IF:68:80:00:26, PPA: bus 1 | Dev 0 | Func W. IGS1 mode: Enabled, IP version: IPv4 +: Select Screen I4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1276, Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Commit Changes and Exit

Press to save changes and return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright 103 2019 American Mestrends, Inc. Advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Commit Changes and Exit +=: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Have & Exit E00: Exit

Discard Changes and Exit

Press to return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration without any change. 

Auto Setup utility - Copyright 107 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. advanced Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Consult Changes and Exit Discard Changes And Exit [Disabled] [Disabled] Discard Changes and Exit +: Select Screen T4: Select Tree Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 8.20.1874. Copyright 107 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Change Attempt Order

Use the arrow keys to select Change Attempt Order. 

Initio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc. advanced MSCI Initiator Name jgn.kid.smc.i.lscsi Add an Attempt Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Delete Attempts Change Attempt Order Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys. Use arrow keys to select the attempt then press +/- to save the attempt down in the attempt order list. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter! Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC4 Exit Version 2.30.1874. Copyright (C) 2019 American Newsrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys. Use drive keys to select the attempt then press +/- to move the attempt down in the attempt order list. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save B-Exit E00: Exit Version 3.20.1276. Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.

Change Attempt Order

This feature is to change the Attempt order. Use arrow keys to select the desired Attempt, then <+/-> keys to move up/down the selected Attempt. For instance, move up the selected Attempt by using <+> key. Move down the selected Attempt by using <-> key. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Connect Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Change Attempt Order Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Change the order of Attempts using +/- keys, Use screw keys to select the attempt then press +/- to save the attempt up/down in the attempt order list. +:-: Select Stream T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESD: Exit. Version 2.20.1774. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Commit Changes and Exit

Press to save changes and return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration. 

Aroio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order Receipt 1 (Auttempt 2) Consult Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Consult Changes and Exit +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1274. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Discard Changes and Exit

Press to return to the main screen of iSCSI Configuration without any change. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Change Attempt Order Attempt 11 Attempt 21 Convit Changes and Exit Discard Changes And Exit Discard Changes and Exit +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F3: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1974. Copyright (C) 2019 American Megatrends, Inc.

Appendix H

Configuring Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

The appendix describes settings of onboard Intel® LAN devices via the BIOS Setup utility supported by the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) driver.

H.1 Network Interface Card (NIC) Settings

Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. Use the arrow keys to select PCIe/PCI/PnP Configuration and press to access the menu items. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss PMI Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Eniquity Configuration Server MC Configuration PCM SATA Configuration PCM SATA Configuration Differential Configuration Super 10 Configuration Serial Port Console Redirection ADPI Settings Trusted Computing BCCI Configuration Inteith Virtual MDD on CPU PCI, PCI-x and PCI Express Settings. +: Select Screen 11: Select Item Enter: Vect +:- Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1268. Copyright (C) 2017 American Newsrends, Inc.

Onboard LAN1 Option ROM (available when NIC(s) is(are) detected by the system)

Use the arrow keys to select Onboard LAN1 Option ROM and press . The options are Disabled, Legacy, and EFI. Set this feature to EFI. 

PCI Bus Driver Version PCI Devices Common Settings: Above 4G Decoding SR-IOV Support MND High Base MND High Granularity Size PCI PCRR/SEWR Support Maximum Read Request HMEF0 Base NAME Firmware Source VM Priority PCIH SLOTLI PCI-E 3.0 X4 (IN X8) CPU SLOTLI PCI-E 3.0 X8 OPRON CPU SLOTLI PCI-E 3.0 X9 OPRON CPU SLOTLI PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON CPU SLOTLI PCI-E 3.0 X16 OPRON H.D PCI-E 3.0 X4 OPRON Onboard LAN Device Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Onboard LAN2 Option ROM Onboard Video Option ROM Network Stack Configuration [Enabled] [Disabled] [Perf] [Enabled] [Auto] [ISO] Onboard LAN1 Option ROM Disabled Legacy EPC [Legacy] [Enabled] [Legacy] [Legacy] [Legacy] Select which firmware function to be loaded for onboard LAN1. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit

 Note : If Onboard LAN1 Option ROM is set to EFI, all features for onboard LAN option ROM will be set to EFI by the EFI driver. Additionally, these features will become unavailable except Onboard LAN1 Option ROM. For the changes to take effect, press to save the settings and exit the BIOS Setup utility. Press during system boot to enter the BIOS Setup utility. Navigate to the Advanced tab. The feature(s) for onboard Intel® LAN device(s) will become available for configuration as shown below. 

Mio Setup Utility - Copyright ICI 2017 American Regatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Logs IPMI Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Chipset Configuration Server MT Configuration PCH SATA Configuration PCH switch Configuration PCIe/PCI/PNP Configuration Super ID Configuration Serial Fort Console Redirection ACSI Settings Trusted Computing IBCSI Configuration Output Virtual RAM or CPU IntelOIS Ethernet Connection X732 for 108/98E-T - ACIIP/108E... IntelOIS Ethernet Connection X732 for 108/98E-T - ACIIP/108E... Configure 10 August Ethernet device parameters +/-: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit version 2.13.1205. Copyright (C) 2017 American Regatrends, Inc.

Use the arrow keys to select the desired onboard LAN device as shown below. 

Notio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Event Loss PMI Security Boot Save & Exit Boot Feature CPU Configuration Chipset Configuration Server ME Configuration PCI4 SATH Configuration PCI5 sSATA Configuration PCI6/PCI7/PCI8 Configuration Super 10 Configuration Serial Port Console Modirection AOSI Settings Trusted Computing BOSI Configuration Data/MS-Vertical/MS-ON CPU Initial/OS Ethernet Connection x73E for 108948E-T - AC11F1081... NAMION Ethernet Connection x73E for 108948E-T - AC11F1081... Configure 10 Gigabit Ethernet device parameters +:- Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 7.15.1208. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. It displays the detailed information for the selected onboard LAN device. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced NIO Configuration BLOCK LEDS 0 UEFI Driver Intel(R) 4000E 2.1.14 Adaptor PBA 02000-000 Device Name Intel(R) Ethernet C... Chip Type Intel X702 PCI Device ID 370F PCI Address 19:00:00 LINK STATUS ID(connected) MAC Address AC:17:68:09:00:25 Virtual MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Click to configure the network device port. +: Select Screen 14: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. P1: General Help P3: Previous Values P3: Optimized Defaults P4: Save a Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.19.1268, Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Blink LEDs

This feature allows the user to set the LED blink duration (in seconds). The valid range is 0\~15 (seconds). 

NIO Configuration NIO LEDs UEFI Driver Adaptor PBA Device Name Chip Type PCI Device ID PCI Address Link Status MAC Address Virtual MAC Address 0 Intel(R) 4002E 2.1.15 02000-000 Intel(R) Ethernet C... Intel X782 3762 (9:00:00) [Disconnected] 4C:IF:68:05:80:2E 00:80:00:00:00:00 Identify the physical network port by blinking the associated LED. +: Select Screen TI: Select Item Enter Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Utilized Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.13.1206 Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

NIC Configuration

Use the arrow keys to select NIC Configuration. 

Ratio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. RHOVANCED ▶ BIOS Configuration 8LINK LEDs 0 UEFI Driver Intel(R) 400GE 2.1.14 Adaptor PBA 020400-000 Device Name Intel(R) Ethernet C... Chip Type Intel X122 PCI Device ID 3702 PCI Address 19:00:01 Link Status ID(connected) MAC Address AC(17):65:09:00:3F Virtual MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Click to configure the network device port. +: Select Screen T1: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Obtained Defaults F4: Save & Exit E0G: Exit Version 2.15.1998. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc.

Press and the following screen will appear. 

Auto Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. Advanced Link Speed Have On LAN [Auto Negotiated] [Enabled] Enable power on of the system via LAN. Note that Configuring Make on LAN in the operating system does not change the value of this setting, but does override the Behavior of wake on LAN in OS controlled other states. +: Select Screen T4: Select Item Enter: Select +/-: Change Opt, F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Optimized Defaults F4: Save S Exit END: Exit.

Wake on LAN

Use the arrow keys to select Wake On LAN and press . The following screen will appear. The options are Disabled and Enabled. Set this feature to support system wake-up via the selected LAN device. 

Aio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc. Advanced Link Speed Make on Use Auto Negotiated (Dissolved) Enable on Link Disabled Enabled Enables the server to be powered on using an in-band Logic packet. +: Select Screen I1: Select Item enter: Select +/-: Change Opt. F1: General Help F2: Previous Values F3: Dated Defaults F4: Save & Exit ESC: Exit Version 2.20.1874, Copyright (C) 2019 American Negatrends, Inc.